Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
2CO	front	intro	ur4j			0		# Introduction to 2 Corinthians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians<br><br>1. Opening and thanksgiving (1:1–7)<br>2. Trouble and boasting (1:8–14)<br>3. Interrupted travel plans (1:15–2:13)<br>      * The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4)<br>      * The person who caused grief (2:5–11)<br>      * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13)<br>4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)<br>      * The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17)<br>      * Qualification for ministry (3:1–6)<br>      * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)<br>      * Suffering and ministry (4:7–18)<br>      * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)<br>      * The gospel (5:11–6:2)<br>      * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)<br>      * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)<br>5. Paul rejoices about Titus’ visit to the Corinthians (7:5–16)<br>6. Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15)<br>      * Example of the Macedonians (8:1–6)<br>      * Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5)<br>      * Blessing and thanksgiving (9:6–15)<br>7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10)<br>      * The true standard for boasting (10:1–18)<br>      * Paul defends his speech and conduct (11:1–15)<br>      * Paul boasts about his suffering (11:16–33)<br>      * Paul’s ascent to heaven and the thorn in the flesh (12:1–10)<br>      * Paul concludes his boasting (12:11–13)<br>      * Paul defends his financial conduct (12:14–18)<br>      * Paul warns the Corinthians about his third visit (12:19–13:10)<br>8. Closing (13:11–13)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?<br><br>Paul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.<br><br>### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?<br><br>In 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.<br><br>Paul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the city of Corinth like?<br><br>Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.<br><br>### What did Paul mean by “false apostles” (11:13)?<br><br>These were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Also, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?<br><br>The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:<br>* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”<br>* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)<br>* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.”<br><br>The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.<br><br>### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord”?<br><br>This kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “A door was opened for me in the Lord,” (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.<br><br>Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What does it mean to be a “new creation” in Christ (5:17)?<br><br>Paul’s message was that God makes Christians part of a “new world” when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?<br>* “and in your love for us” (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, “and in our love for you.” There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2CO	1	intro	tsh3			0		# 2 Corinthians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Outline of Chapter One<br><br>1. Paul greets and blesses the Corinthian Christians (1:1-2)<br>1. Paul praises God for his comfort in affliction (1:3-1:11)<br>1. Paul explains his conduct and his change of plans (1:12-2:4)<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special Concepts<br><br>### Comfort<br><br>Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. Paul explains that believers experience affliction because they belong to Jesus. When this happens, the Holy Spirit comforts them. Then they are able to comfort others. Paul wants the Corinthian believers to know that he is not exempt from terrible persecution but that God always rescues and comforts him, as well. He also wants them to know that God will do the same for them.<br><br><br>### Paul’s integrity<br><br><br>Apparently, people in Corinth had been criticizing Paul, saying that he was not sincere and did not truly care about the Corinthian believers. Therefore, Paul refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical question<br><br>Paul uses two rhetorical questions in 1:17 to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Metaphorical “Yes and No”<br><br>In 1:17-20 Paul uses the words “yes” and “no” together to represent the attitudes and speech of a person who is unstable and easily changes his mind about what he wants to do. It seems that some people had been accusing Paul of being such a person, but he makes it clear that he is not. Instead, he imitates God who is always faithful, and Jesus, who faithfully fulfills all of the promises of God.   <br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Holy Spirit as guarantee<br><br>In 1:22 Paul says that the Holy Spirit is the “guarantee” of all of God's promises, including eternal life with him. The term comes from business deals in which a  person gives some valuable item to another person as a “guarantee” that the first person will pay the full amount of money that he owes. Other words for this idea include “pledge” or “down-payment.” Paul uses this idea to explain that, because believers experience the blessings of the Holy Spirit now, they can be sure that they will experience all of God’s given promises after they die. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])<br><br>### God as witness<br><br>In 1:23 Paul calls God to be a witness to his character, that he is being honest and faithful to the Corinthian believers. It is probable that Paul means this as an oath, in which it is expected that God would bear witness to what Paul is saying by dramatically punishing him or striking him dead if he is lying. Alternatively, he may intend that God will bear witness by affirming Paul's honesty to the Corinthian believers through the Holy Spirit.
2CO	1	1	mel3	figs-explicit	Παῦλος & τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ	1	Paul … to the church of God that is in Corinth	Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. For example, you may want to indicate that this is a letter. Alternate translation: “I, Paul … wrote this letter to you, the church of God that is in Corinth”
2CO	1	1	f59u	figs-exclusive	Τιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς	1	Timothy our brother	The word **our** here includes the Corinthian believers. The original has only “the brother,” but the word “our” was considered necessary for English. Use the word that is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	1	1	mhg5	translate-names	Ἀχαΐᾳ	1	Achaia	**Achaia** is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2CO	1	2	heps	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ	1		After stating his name and the people to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace and peace from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
2CO	1	2	f6k1		χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	May grace be to you and peace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **Grace** and **peace**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I pray that God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ will be favorable to you and give you a peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	3	px2q	figs-activepassive	εὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	May the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ be praised	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May we always praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	1	3	xshp	translate-blessing	εὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		After blessing the recipients of his letter, Paul adds a blessing to God. If your people would consider it strange for people to bless God, then translate it as praise, since that is what we do when we bless God. Alternate translation: “May we always praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
2CO	1	3	k7dl	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ	1	the God and Father	**Father** is an important title for God. Both **God** and **Father** refer to God. This phrase could mean (1) God is both God and Father to our Lord Jesus, or (2) God is Father to our Lord Jesus. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father”
2CO	1	3	pg4a	figs-possession	ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως	1	the Father of mercies and the God of all comfort	Here, the possessive form describes **mercies** and **all comfort** as coming from God, who is their source. Both **Father** and **God** are the same person. Alternate translation: “the Father who is the source of mercies and the God who is the source of all comfort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	1	3	tksv	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **mercies** and **comfort**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the Father who is merciful and the God who always comforts his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	3	cen3		πάσης παρακλήσεως	1		Here, **all** could refer to: (1) time. Alternate translation: “who always comforts his people” (2) quantity. Alternate translation: “from whom every instance of comforting comes”
2CO	1	4	n2lc	figs-exclusive	παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν	1	comforts us in all our affliction	Here and continuing through verse 5, the pronouns **us**, **our**, and **we** probably include the Corinthian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	1	4	ggj8	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς τὸ	1		This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God gives us afflictions and then comfort. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2CO	1	4	tl0d	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν, εἰς τὸ δύνασθαι ἡμᾶς παρακαλεῖν τοὺς ἐν πάσῃ θλίψει	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **affliction** and **tribulation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the one comforting us whenever people afflict us, so that we are able to comfort others whenever people afflict them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	4	cxwj	figs-explicitinfo	διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **comfort** or would not use both the noun **comfort** and the verb **comforted** together, you could express the same idea by using only the verb. Alternate translation: “in the same way in which we ourselves are comforted” or “just as we ourselves are comforted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
2CO	1	4	eh7l	figs-rpronouns	παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ	1		Paul uses the word **ourselves** to emphasize that we, even though we are weak human beings, can comfort others as God comforted us. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “even we are comforted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2CO	1	4	hlnx	figs-activepassive	παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God comforts even us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	1	5	nn5a	figs-metaphor	ὅτι καθὼς περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς	1	For just as the sufferings of Christ abound toward us	Here Paul speaks of the **sufferings of Christ** as if they were objects that could increase and move toward him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a different metaphor or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “For just as people made Christ suffer, they are now making us suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	1	5	tg9w	figs-metaphor	περισσεύει & ἡ παράκλησις ἡμῶν	2	our comfort abounds	Here Paul speaks of **comfort** as if it were an object that could increase in size. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a different metaphor or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God comforts us abundantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	1	6	y9bi	figs-exclusive	εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα	1	But if we are afflicted	Here and through the first half of verse 21, the word **we** and other first-person pronouns refer to Paul and Timothy, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	1	6	bbff		εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα	1		There is no strong contrast here. Rather, Paul continues to talk about suffering and comfort. If it is helpful in your language, you do not need to use a word here that indicates a contrast with what came before. Alternate translation: “If we are afflicted”
2CO	1	6	ylw2	figs-activepassive	εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But if people afflict us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	1	6	pxy2	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα	1		Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it does happen. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “When we are afflicted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	1	6	gfyd	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν παρακλήσεως καὶ σωτηρίας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **comfort** and **salvation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “it is so that you can be comforted and saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	6	wyj4	figs-activepassive	εἴτε παρακαλούμεθα	1	if we are comforted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if God comforts us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	1	6	ujj7	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε παρακαλούμεθα	1		Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it does happen. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when we are comforted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	1	6	w94l	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν παρακλήσεως	2		See how you translated this same phrase earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “it is so that you can be comforted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	6	mx46	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ὑπομονῇ τῶν αὐτῶν παθημάτων	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **endurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as you endure the same sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	7	ot4d	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, εἰδότες ὅτι ὡς κοινωνοί ἐστε τῶν παθημάτων, οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because we know that you share in God's comfort just as much as in the suffering, our hope concerning you is firm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	1	7	n3nl	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “And we firmly believe that you will endure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	7	klvm	figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1		If your language requires you to specify the content of Paul's **hope**, you can include this information. Alternate translation: “And our hope that you will remain faithful to Jesus is firm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	1	7	a4vz	figs-abstractnouns	οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **comfort**, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this word in verses 5 and 6. Alternate translation: “God will also comfort you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	7	ca1o	figs-ellipsis	οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “in the same way you are partakers also of the comfort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	1	8	jqn8	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ & θέλομεν ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν	1	we do not want you to be uninformed	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **ignorant**. Alternate translation: “we want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2CO	1	8	lgs0	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὲρ τῆς θλίψεως ἡμῶν τῆς γενομένης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “concerning the time when people caused us to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	8	pr8a	figs-metaphor	καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐβαρήθημεν	1	We were so completely crushed beyond our strength	Here, Paul is speaking of **tribulation** as if it were a heavy weight that they had to carry. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we were suffering so much that we thought that we could not endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	1	8	gu5b	figs-activepassive	ὑπερβολὴν & ἐβαρήθημεν	1	We were so completely crushed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it was excessively difficult for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	1	8	t4iy	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		Here, **so that** introduces the result of what came before. Use a natural way to introduce a result in your language. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	1	9	lks3	figs-metaphor	αὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου ἐσχήκαμεν	1	we had the sentence of death on us	Paul is comparing the certainty of death that they experienced to that of someone who receives a **sentence of death**, that is, an order from a judge that he must be executed. Alternate translation: “we were as sure of our own deaths as someone is who is condemned to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	1	9	dttx	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here the connecting words **so that** introduce a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose that God had for Paul and his companions to feel that they would die is for them to trust in God. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2CO	1	9	i7up	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ τῷ Θεῷ	1	but in God	Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but instead, we would be trusting in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	1	9	bu2y	figs-idiom	τῷ ἐγείροντι τοὺς νεκρούς	1	who raises the dead	Here, **raising the dead** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “who causes the dead to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	1	10	x4kh	figs-metonymy	τηλικούτου θανάτου	1	a deadly peril	Here, **so great a death** represents the terrible persecution that Paul and his companions were experiencing and that they were convinced would end in death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the jaws of death” or “such a deadly danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	1	10	eitn	figs-explicit	καὶ ῥύσεται	1		The implication is that God will rescue Paul and his companions from similar dangerous situations in the future. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and whenever we are in danger, God will rescue us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	1	10	c2xx	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὃν ἠλπίκαμεν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we trust God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	11	q17d	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν τῇ δεήσει	1	as you also join together … on our behalf	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **supplication**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by praying to God for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	11	xftq	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The connecting words **so that** introduce a goal or purpose relationship. Paul presents the purpose of the Corinthians praying for him to be that many people will be thanking God. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2CO	1	11	h0u2	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων & εὐχαριστηθῇ	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that many faces may give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	1	11	oskx	figs-synecdoche	ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων	1		Paul is using **faces** to represent people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the lips of many” or “from many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2CO	1	11	bmze	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ εἰς ἡμᾶς χάρισμα	1		This **gracious gift** is something that God will do for Paul and his companions in the future in answer to many people's prayers. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **gift**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God will have graciously given us what we needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	11	dptz	figs-ellipsis	διὰ πολλῶν	1		Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the ideas earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “through the prayers of many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	1	12	kqv3	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἀνεστράφημεν	1	General Information:	In these verses Paul uses the words **our**, **we**, and **ourselves** to refer to himself and Timothy and possibly others who serve with them. These words do not include the people he is writing to. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	1	12	r9p8		ἡ γὰρ καύχησις ἡμῶν αὕτη ἐστίν	1	For our proud confidence is this	The word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of wanting to tell others your feeling of great satisfaction and joy in doing something well. Alternate translation: “This is something that we feel very good about”
2CO	1	12	c7mu	figs-personification	τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν	1	the testimony of our conscience	Here, Paul speaks of his **conscience** as if it were a person who could testify. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we know by our conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2CO	1	12	hs5l	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **testimony** and **conscience**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “our hearts tell us it is true” or “we are sure of it within ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	12	xxc3	figs-rpronouns	ἀνεστράφημεν	1		The phrase **we controlled ourselves** means that Paul and his companions controlled their own actions. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this idea. Alternate translation: “we acted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2CO	1	12	c2z9	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ	1		Paul is using **the world** to represent people who live in the world, that is, people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “among everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2CO	1	12	nc7o	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἁγιότητι καὶ εἰλικρινείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **holiness** and **sincerity**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as people whom God empowers to obey him and to be honest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	12	c1bd	figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ	1	not relying on fleshly wisdom but on the grace of God.	Here, **fleshly** represents what is natural and human as opposed to what is spiritual and godly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not according to natural human wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	1	12	qej6	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wisdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not according to what people naturally think is wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	12	ieqv	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν χάριτι Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to what God tells us to do because he loves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	13	c6t4	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		The word translated as **For** here connects this verse to the previous one as evidence that supports the claim that Paul made in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for connecting this evidence to the previous statement. Alternate translation: “You see,” or “As you know,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	1	13	h2f4	writing-politeness	γράφομεν	1		Here Paul may be referring to himself with the plural pronoun **we** to show that he is only part of a group. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could use the singular “I” here instead, as later in the verse. Alternate translation: “I write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
2CO	1	13	h21j	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ γὰρ ἄλλα γράφομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλ’ ἢ ἃ ἀναγινώσκετε ἢ καὶ ἐπιγινώσκετε	1	For we write no other things to you, but that which you read or also understand	Paul is expressing a positive meaning here by using the two negative phrases, **no other … but**. If it would be helpful, you could use an equivalent expression in your language or you could express the plain positive meaning. Alternate translation: “For everything we write to you is straight talk” or “For what we write to you is just what you read and understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2CO	1	13	vtx8		ἕως τέλους	1		This could mean: (1) Paul hopes that the Corinthians will understand everything that he is trying to say to them. Alternate translation: “all of it” or “fully” (2) Paul hopes that the Corinthians will continue to understand what he is saying to them until Jesus returns. Alternate translation: “until the end”
2CO	1	14	ma5m		καύχημα ὑμῶν	1	your reason for boasting	The word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of wanting to tell others your feeling of great satisfaction and joy in something good. See how you translated this in verse 12. Alternate translation: “something that you feel very good about”
2CO	1	14	p1pi	figs-ellipsis	καθάπερ καὶ ὑμεῖς ἡμῶν	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as you also are our boasting” or “just as you also are our reason to boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	1	14	urdj	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	2		This occurrence of **our** includes the Corinthian believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	1	15	n5ex	writing-pronouns	ταύτῃ τῇ πεποιθήσει	1	with this confidence	The word **this** refers to what Paul has just said in verses 13 and 14. Paul was confident that the Corinthians would understand him and that they would be proud of him (very pleased with him). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the reference clear. Alternate translation: “confident that you were proud of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	1	15	ehdw	figs-abstractnouns	ταύτῃ τῇ πεποιθήσει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confidence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being confident of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	15	xdb4	figs-explicit	πρότερον	1		This could mean: (1) Paul intended to visit the Corinthians before going to Macedonia. Alternate translation: “before going to Macedonia” or (2) Paul intended to visit the Corinthians before he changed his plans. Alternate translation: “originally” or “at first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	1	15	ln3b	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		The connecting words **so that** introduce a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose for Paul's plan of two visits is to give the Corinthians two times of grace or blessings. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2CO	1	15	y432		δευτέραν χάριν σχῆτε	1	you might have a second blessing	The word translated as **grace** here can mean more specifically “gift” or “benefit” or “blessing.” Alternate translation: “you might benefit from me visiting you twice”
2CO	1	16	glgv	figs-metonymy	δι’ ὑμῶν διελθεῖν	1		Here, **you** represents the place where the Corinthians live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to pass through your city” or “to visit you and then go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	1	16	mp6u	figs-euphemism	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν	1	to be sent on my way to Judea by you	Paul is referring to the Corinthians giving him money and food in a polite way by using the phrase **be sent ahead … by you**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “to allow you to assist me so that I can continue on to Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
2CO	1	16	tk5u	figs-activepassive	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have you send me ahead to Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	1	17	ehze	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1		The pronoun **this** refers to Paul's plan to visit the Corinthians two times. If this is not clear for your readers, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “to visit you twice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	1	17	zms7	figs-rquestion	μήτι ἄρα τῇ ἐλαφρίᾳ ἐχρησάμην?	1	I did not then take it lightly, did I?	Paul is using the question form here to emphasize that he did not change his plan to visit the Corinthians lightly. The expected answer to the question is “no”. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I did not then act capriciously!” or “I did not become unstable.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	1	17	chy9	figs-rquestion	ἢ ἃ βουλεύομαι, κατὰ σάρκα βουλεύομαι, ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ?	1	Do I plan things according to human standards … at the same time?	Paul is using the question form here to emphasize that he does not make or change his plans according to his own desires. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I do not plan things according to the flesh, so that I would say “Yes, yes” and “No, no” at the same time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	1	17	p0sf	figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1		Here, **according to the flesh** is an idiom that means “based on changeable human desires.” If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “according to what I happen to be feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	1	17	fq3t	figs-explicit	ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ?	1		This could mean: (1) Paul would say both that he would visit and that he would not visit at nearly the same time. Alternate translation: “so that I say ‘Yes, I will certainly visit’ and ‘No, I will definitely not visit’ at the same time” (2) Paul would say that he would visit while intending that he would not visit. Alternate translation: “so that I say ‘Yes, I will certainly visit’ even though I was intending that I would not visit” In either case, he is denying the accusation against him that he is unreliable. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	1	17	y41z	figs-doublet	ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ?	1	Do I plan things … so that I say “Yes, yes” and “No, no” at the same time?	The words **Yes, yes** and **No, no** are both repeated for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “so that I would say both ‘yes’ and ‘no’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2CO	1	18	icwz	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1		The connecting word here could indicate: (1) a comparison. Paul may be comparing the faithfulness of God to his own commitment to speak truthfully to the Corinthian believers. Alternate translation: “and in the same way” (2) a result. Paul may be saying that he is faithful in his speaking because he is following God's example to be faithful. Alternate translation: “so because of that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	1	18	qutd	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος ἡμῶν	1		Paul is using the term **word** to refer to any message that he gave to the Corinthians by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	1	18	hmuj	figs-idiom	ναὶ καὶ οὔ	1		Here, **“Yes” and “No”** represent the speech of a person who says contradictory things. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “out of both sides of our mouth” or “one thing and then its opposite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	1	19	jmcj	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word translated **For** connects this verse to the one before it as an explanation. If the connection between this statement and the previous one is not clear, you may want to use a similar connecting word here. Alternate translation: “You see,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	1	19	hd2t	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ & Υἱὸς	1	the Son of God	**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
2CO	1	19	aqzq	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐν ὑμῖν δι’ ἡμῶν κηρυχθείς, δι’ ἐμοῦ, καὶ Σιλουανοῦ, καὶ Τιμοθέου	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I and Silvanus and Timothy proclaimed among you,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	1	19	ql6b	translate-names	Σιλουανοῦ	1		This is the name of the man who is called “Silas” in the book of Acts and who was a leader in the early church. You may want to use one spelling here and put the other spelling in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2CO	1	19	t98z	figs-idiom	ναὶ καὶ οὒ, ἀλλὰ ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν	1		Here **“Yes” and “No”** represent a person who is unreliable. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated this in verse 18. Alternate translation: “wishy-washy, but, as we said, a rock” or “unreliable, but we consistently showed you that he is trustworthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	1	19	xmu6	writing-pronouns	ἀλλὰ ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν	1		Here, the subject of the verb **has been**, represented by **it**, could refer to: (1) the proclamation of Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “but our proclamation has been ‘Yes’ in him” (2) Jesus. In this case, **in him** would be translated as “in it,” referring to the proclamation. Alternate translation: “but he has been ‘Yes’ in it” or “but Jesus has been ‘Yes’ in our proclamation” (3) reality in general. Alternate translation: “but it has always been the case that there has been ‘Yes’ in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	1	20	h2xc	figs-idiom	ὅσαι & ἐπαγγελίαι Θεοῦ, ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί	1	all the promises of God are “Yes” in him	This means that Jesus makes all of the **promises of God** come to pass. He guarantees them. Alternate translation: “Jesus fulfills all of the promises of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	1	20	h4uv	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῷ & δι’ αὐτοῦ	1	“Yes” in him … through him we say	Both occurrences of the word **him** in this verse refer to Jesus Christ. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use his name here. Alternate translation: “in Jesus … through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	1	20	lz2n	figs-ellipsis	τὸ Ἀμὴν & δι’ ἡμῶν	1		Paul is leaving out a verb of speaking that in many languages this sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply this word if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the ‘Amen’ is spoken by us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	1	20	sqpx	figs-activepassive	τὸ Ἀμὴν & δι’ ἡμῶν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we say the ‘Amen’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	1	20	hro4	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Here, **us** includes the Corinthian believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	1	20	uuxh	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς δόξαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that we glorify God” or “so that we honor God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	21	n5eq	figs-explicit	εἰς Χριστὸν	1		Here, Paul is speaking of the relationship of believers to Christ as if they were located **in Christ**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in close relationship with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	1	21	tjc6	figs-explicit	χρίσας ἡμᾶς	1	he anointed us	The implication is that God has anointed believers with the Holy Spirit so that they can live for him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having anointed us with the Holy Spirit to live for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	1	21	f4c4	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	2		Here, **us** probably includes the Corinthian believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	1	22	z43l	figs-metaphor	σφραγισάμενος ἡμᾶς	1	the one who also sealed us	Paul speaks of God showing that we belong to him as if God had put a visible mark of ownership on us. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having claimed us as his own” or “who has shown that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	1	22	laq1	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἡμῶν	1		Here, **us** and **our** include Paul and all believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	1	22	jcv7	figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	the pledge of the Spirit	Here, Paul is speaking of **the Spirit** as if he were a **down payment**, that is, a partial payment for a purchase with a promise to pay the rest of the amount on a future date. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a guarantee that he will also give us every blessing that he has promised to us, which is the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	1	22	xe98	figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	he gave us the pledge of the Spirit in our hearts	Here the word **hearts** refers to the innermost part of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in our innermost beings” or “to live within each of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	1	23	j8lc		ἐγὼ δὲ μάρτυρα τὸν Θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι ἐπὶ τὴν ἐμὴν ψυχήν	1	Now I call God as a witness to my soul	The phrase **I invoke God as a witness upon my soul** could be: (1) an oath formula. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “Now I swear to God upon my soul” (2) simply a statement that God knows Paul's motives. Alternate translation: “Now I call upon God as a witness to my intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula]])
2CO	1	23	vrkv	figs-metonymy	ἐγὼ δὲ μάρτυρα τὸν Θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι ἐπὶ τὴν ἐμὴν ψυχήν	1		Here, **soul** represents the life of the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “So may God take my life if I am lying, but he knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	1	23	j15t		ὅτι φειδόμενος ὑμῶν	1	so that I might spare you	Here, **that** introduces a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose for which Paul canceled his visit to Corinth was to spare causing pain to the Corinthian believers (see 2:1). Use a connector or phrase in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. Alternate translation: “that it was in order to spare you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2CO	1	23	xzir	figs-ellipsis	ὅτι φειδόμενος ὑμῶν οὐκέτι ἦλθον εἰς Κόρινθον	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “that it was in order to spare you sorrow that I have not yet come to Corinth” or “that it was to keep from grieving you that I have not yet traveled to Corinth another time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	1	24	hepi	figs-ellipsis	οὐχ ὅτι	1		Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I do not mean that” or “I do not say that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	1	24	mrzw	figs-idiom	κυριεύομεν	1		Here, **lord it over** is an idiom that means “act like the masters of.” If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we want to be in charge of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	1	24	hafq	figs-abstractnouns	κυριεύομεν ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Here, **faith** could mean: (1) what the Corinthians believe. Alternate translation: “we dictate to you what you must believe” (2) how the Corinthians relate to God. Alternate translation: “we are in charge of your relationship to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	24	lz4e	figs-exclusive	συνεργοί ἐσμεν	1		Here the pronoun **we** could refer to: (1) Paul and his companions, but not the Corinthian believers. (2) Paul, his companions, and the Corinthian believers. We recommend using the exclusive form here if your language marks that distinction, to be the same as the previous “we” in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	1	24	cyu4	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς χαρᾶς ὑμῶν	1	we are fellow workers with you for your joy	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that you will be joyful” or “to make you happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	1	24	kv47	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, **for** connects the following statement as a reason for the previous two statements. Use a natural form in your language for connecting this statement to the previous ones as the reason. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	1	24	cih8	figs-idiom	ἑστήκατε	1	you stand firm in the faith	Here, **stand firm** means to be steady, resolute, or established. Alternate translation: “you are well established” or “you are strong and steady” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	1	24	xf2i	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ & πίστει	1		Here, **in the faith** could mean: (1) “in regard to your faith.” In other words, the Corinthian believers are independent of Paul in regard to their faith. They are responsible only to God for what they believe and do. Alternate translation: “concerning your commitment to God” (2) “because of your faith.” In other words, the Corinthian believers continue to belong to God because of their faith, not because of Paul's authority. Alternate translation: “because you trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	intro	hy3h			0		# 2 Corinthians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>3. Interrupted travel plans (1:15–2:13)<br>      * The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4)<br>      * The person who caused grief (2:5–11)<br>      * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13)<br>4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)<br>      * The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The previous letter<br><br>In [2:3–4](../02/03.md), [9](../02/09.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter because of his love for them. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians. <br><br>### “Grieving” others<br><br>Paul refers to “sorrow,” “grief,” and “grieving” others multiple times in [2:1–8](../02/01.md). These words refer to how people who are close friends can “grieve” or hurt each other by what they say and do. These words do not refer to physically hurting someone. Rather, they refer to hurting someone inside. Paul acknowledges that his letter might have “grieved” them, and he also indicates that one of the Corinthians has “grieved” fellow believers. Consider a natural way to refer to one person hurting or injuring another person inside. <br><br>### The person who caused grief<br><br>In [2:5–11](../02/05.md), Paul refers to a person who has caused grief. Almost certainly, he has one specific person in mind. Paul is not clear about what this person did to cause the grief. He or she may have committed a sexual sin or stolen money from the church or opposed Paul’s authority. Whatever the person did, Paul chooses not to be specific about the person or what he or she did. Perhaps this is because he wants the Corinthians to forgive and show love to this person now that he or she has properly been disciplined by the church. In your translation, use general words for both the person and what the person did. <br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Aroma and fragrance<br><br>In [2:14–16](../02/14.md), Paul identifies himself and those who serve with him as an “aroma” or “fragrance.” Paul could be thinking in general of smells and odors, or he could be referring to the smell from incense and sacrifices offered during a “triumphal procession” (see [2:14](../02/14.md)), or he could be referring to the smell from sacrifices offered at the temple. Whatever exact smells Paul has in mind, he is clear that he and those with him are a smell that comes from Christ, and people react to it very differently: some think it is the smell of death, while others think it is the smell of life. Paul speaks in this way because smells spread throughout a whole area, and people have to react to them. Just like that, he and those with him spread the gospel throughout the world, and people have to respond to it. Further, just as some people like a smell and others hate it, so some people believe the gospel and receive life from God, while others reject the gospel and perish. If possible, preserve the “aroma” and “fragrance” language. If necessary, you could use a simile to express the idea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Paul’s use of pronouns<br><br>In [2:1–13](../02/01.md), Paul consistently uses the first person singular to refer to himself and the second person plural to refer to the Corinthians. The only exception is in [2:11](../02/11.md), where Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and the Corinthians. However, in [2:14–17](../02/14.md), Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and those preaching the gospel with him. In these verses, “we” does not include the Corinthians. It is unclear exactly whom Paul includes in “we”: it could be just he and Titus, or he and the group that works with him, or he and everyone else who preaches the gospel. Consider natural ways to represent these changes in reference throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])<br><br>### Paul’s travel<br><br>In [2:12–13](../02/12.md), Paul describes some of his travels. Troas is a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Since Troas was a port city, most likely Paul sailed from there to Macedonia, which is the northern part of what is now Greece. Since Corinth is in southern Greece, Paul was not too far away from the Corinthians. Paul continues the description of what happened in Macedonia in [7:5–7](../07/05.md). Consider what information your readers need to know to understand Paul’s travels, and include what is necessary in your translation or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/troas]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/macedonia]])
2CO	2	1	wh9c	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in [1:23](../01/23.md) about the reason why he did not visit Corinth, which was to “spare” them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is why I have not come to Corinth:” or “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	2	1	wpd4	writing-pronouns	ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο τὸ μὴ	1		Here, the word **this** refers ahead to what Paul is about to say: **not to come to you again in sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to explicit, or you could rephrase the sentence so that you do not use **this**. Alternate translation: “for myself what follows: not” or “for myself not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	2	1	yz5q	figs-idiom	ἐμαυτῷ	1		Here the phrase **for myself** indicates that Paul made this choice because of reasons he thought about. In other words, he was not forced to make this choice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that someone made their own choice or decision. Alternate translation: “on my own” or “in my own mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	2	1	yrbk	figs-go	τὸ μὴ & ἐλθεῖν	1		Here the word **come** refers to traveling from somewhere else to Corinth to visit the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “not to travel” or “not to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2CO	2	1	ma6n	figs-explicit	πάλιν	1		Here, the word **again** implies that Paul has already visited the Corinthians **in sorrow**. He does not give many details about this visit. It cannot be the first time that he visited the Corinthians, so he must have visited them again **in sorrow** sometimes between when he first met them and when he wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the implication more explicit. Alternate translation: “a second time” or “yet again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	1	hu8y	figs-explicit	ἐν λύπῃ	1		Here the ones who experience the **sorrow** could be: (1) Paul and the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in sorrow for all of us” (2) just the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in sorrow for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	1	ij73	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν λύπῃ	1	in sorrow	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “in a sorrowful way” or “in a way that makes us sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	2	jb50	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul is avoiding the “sorrow” he mentioned in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “I decided that because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	2	2	q4aq	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ & ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς	1		Here Paul refers to a situation that has not happened and which he intends to keep from happening. He refers to the situation using the conditional form to indicate what would result from the situation if it did happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to something that may not happen but that the author wishes to speak about. Alternate translation: “supposing that I myself grieved you” or “were I myself to grieve you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
2CO	2	2	le34	figs-rpronouns	ἐγὼ λυπῶ	1		Here, the word **myself** emphasizes **I**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **I** in your language. Alternate translation: “it is I myself who grieve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2CO	2	2	nb6x	figs-rquestion	καὶ τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ?	1	If I caused you pain, who could cheer me up but the very one who was hurt by me?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “there is no one else.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then there is no one cheering me up, except the one being grieved by me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	2	2	mbbo	figs-genericnoun	τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος	1		Here the author uses the singular form **the one** to refer in general to people, particularly to the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers in general to people. Alternate translation: “who are those cheering me up, except those being grieved” or “who are those cheering me up, except you who are being grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2CO	2	2	mbag	grammar-connect-exceptions	τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this question to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “is it not the one being grieved by me who is the only one cheering me up” or “is there any one cheering me up besides the one being grieved by me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
2CO	2	2	x2vr	figs-activepassive	ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ	1	the very one who was hurt by me	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I have grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	2	3	kxu2	figs-explicit	ἔγραψα	1	I wrote this same thing	Here Paul refers to a letter he had already written to the Corinthians. Most likely, he wrote this letter sometime between 1 Corinthians and 2 Corinthians, but we do not have the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that Paul is referring to a letter that he already sent to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my last letter” or “I sent you the previous letter that said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	3	e7c4	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο αὐτὸ	1		Here, the phrase **this same thing** refers to what Paul wrote in the previous letter. He could referring to: (1) what he just wrote in [2:1–2](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “the same thing I am now writing” (2) the contents of the previous letter in general. Alternate translation: “those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	2	3	abty	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἐλθὼν	1		Here, the phrase **having come** refers to something that an event that is still in the future for Paul but that would happen at the same as **I might not have sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happens at the same time as another event in the future. Alternate translation: “whenever I came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2CO	2	3	l9t0	figs-go	ἐλθὼν	1		Here, the word **come** refers to Paul’s plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to traveling to visit someone. Alternate translation: “having arrived” or “having come to visit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2CO	2	3	v87i	figs-abstractnouns	μὴ & λύπην σχῶ ἀφ’	1	I might not be hurt by those who should have made me rejoice	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “I might not become sorrowful because of” or “I might not be sad because of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	3	owzn		ἀφ’ ὧν ἔδει με χαίρειν	1		Here, this clause could indicate that **it is necessary** for: (1) Paul to **rejoice** in the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “from those in which it is necessary for me to rejoice” (2) the Corinthians to give “joy” to Paul. Alternate translation: “from those for whom it is necessary to give me joy”
2CO	2	3	p4q2	grammar-connect-logic-result	πεποιθὼς	1		Here, the phrase **having confidence** introduces a reason why Paul **wrote** the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because I had confidence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	2	3	b6f9	figs-abstractnouns	πεποιθὼς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “being confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	3	i5r6		ἡ ἐμὴ χαρὰ πάντων ὑμῶν ἐστιν	1	my joy is the same joy you all have	Here Paul could be stating that his **joy**: (1) leads to the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “my joy leads to your joy” (2) has the same source as the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “what gives me joy is what gives you joy” (3) comes from the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “my joy comes from your joy”
2CO	2	3	gmyo	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἐμὴ χαρὰ πάντων ὑμῶν ἐστιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **joy**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rejoice” or an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “I am joyful and so you are joyful” or “I rejoice and so you rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	4	p4n6	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation about the letter that Paul **wrote** to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As it is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	2	4	tl4m	figs-explicit	ἔγραψα	1		Here, the phrase **I wrote** again refers to the previous letter. See how you translated “I wrote” in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “I wrote that letter” or “I sent that previous letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	4	uch7	figs-idiom	ἐκ & ἔγραψα ὑμῖν	1	from great affliction	Here Paul refers to “writing” **out of** something else. In his culture, this form referred to what the person was experiencing while they **wrote**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to what an author experiences while they are writing something. Alternate translation: “I wrote to you as I experienced” or “I wrote to you while I felt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	2	4	oz8a	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ & πολλῆς θλίψεως καὶ συνοχῆς καρδίας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **tribulation** and **anguish**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “suffer” and “distress.” Alternate translation: “as I suffered much and was distressed in my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	4	vs7m	figs-metonymy	συνοχῆς καρδίας	1	with anguish of heart	In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “anguish of mind” or “emotional anguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	2	4	d5vf	figs-idiom	διὰ πολλῶν δακρύων	1	with many tears	Here, the phrase **through many tears** indicates what Paul was doing while he **wrote** the letter. The word **tears** refers to the act of crying or weeping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that a person is crying or weeping while they are doing something. Alternate translation: “with much crying” or “as I shed many tears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	2	4	y0t3	figs-infostructure	οὐχ ἵνα λυπηθῆτε, ἀλλὰ τὴν ἀγάπην ἵνα γνῶτε, ἣν ἔχω περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς	1		If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “so that you might know the love that I have more abundantly for you, not so that you would be grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	2	4	uc77	figs-activepassive	λυπηθῆτε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who would do the action, the Paul implies that “he himself” would do it. Alternate translation: “I would grieve you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	2	4	g826	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἀγάπην & ἣν ἔχω περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “how abundantly I love you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	4	zw13		περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς	1		Here, the phrase **more abundantly** could indicate that: (1) Paul has “abundant” love for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “most abundantly for you” or “very abundantly for you” (2) Paul loves the Corinthians more than he loves other people. Alternate translation: “more abundantly for you than I have for others”
2CO	2	5	xomm	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δέ	1		Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how Paul did not want to “grieve” them. Here he addresses how someone has **caused grief**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	2	5	xlxc	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & τις λελύπηκεν, οὐκ & λελύπηκεν	1		Here Paul is speaking as if someone causing **grief** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that someone has indeed **caused grief**. Alternate translation: “the person who caused grief has not grieved only” or “if anyone has caused grief, and it has happened, he has not grieved only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	2	5	ln83	figs-abstractnouns	λελύπηκεν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grief**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “grieve.” Alternate translation: “has grieved people” or “has caused others to grieve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	5	j6bn	figs-gendernotations	οὐκ & λελύπηκεν	1		Here, Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has **grieved** others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “that individual has not grieved only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	2	5	d7fx	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἐμὲ λελύπηκεν	1		Here Paul could be indicating that the person has: (1) **grieved** Paul some, but mostly the person has **grieved** the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he has not grieved me much” (2) not **grieved** Paul at all but only the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he has not grieved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	5	rvpt	figs-idiom	ἀπὸ μέρους	1		Here, the phrase **in part** indicates that only some of an action or group is involved. In this case, Paul could be using **in part** to refer to: (1) how many of the Corinthians have been **grieved**. Alternate translation: “some of you” or “part of your group” (2) how much the Corinthians have been **grieved**. Alternate translation: “he has partially grieved you” or “you also in part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	2	5	iva7	figs-infostructure	ἀπὸ μέρους, ἵνα μὴ ἐπιβαρῶ πάντας ὑμᾶς	1		There are several ways to understood how the pieces of the sentence go together. You could translate the sentence so that: (1) **in order that I might not burden all of you** indicates the reason why Paul uses the phrase **in part**, which would refer to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “you in part, which I say so that I might not burden all of you” (2) **in part** and **all of you** go together, and **in order that I might not burden** is a parenthetical statement explaining why Paul says **in part**. Alternate translation: “in part—which I say so that I might not burden—all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	2	5	or46	figs-metaphor	μὴ ἐπιβαρῶ	1		Here, to **burden** someone refers to placing a heavy object on someone’s back. Paul could be using the phrase **I might not burden** to refer to: (1) how he is trying to avoid saying too much about the situation. In other words, Paul uses the phrase **in part** because he does not want to make his words too strong, which would make the words like a person carrying a heaven load. Alternate translation: “I might not say too much about” or “I might not exaggerate about” (2) how he wants to avoid troubling or distressing all of them, which would be like “burdening” them with a heavy object. Alternate translation: “I might not distress” or “I might not trouble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	2	6	wr3k	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ τοιούτῳ ἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **punishment**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “punish.” Alternate translation: “How such a person has been punished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	6	iy4r	figs-extrainfo	ἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη	1	This punishment of that person by the majority is enough	Here, the word **This** indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew what the **punishment** was. However, Paul never states exactly what the punishment was. You should use a word or phrase that is as general as what Paul used. Alternate translation: “That punishment” or “The punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2CO	2	6	g3eo	writing-pronouns	τῷ τοιούτῳ	1		Here Paul speaks in general terms about **such a {person}**. However, he is referring more specifically to the person that he mentioned in the previous verse, the one who “grieved” the Corinthians (see [2:5](../02/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this reference more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the person we are talking about” or “on that individual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	2	6	z2dt	translate-unknown	τῶν πλειόνων	1		Here, the word **majority** refers to more than half of a group. Often it means most of the group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that Paul is referring to “most” of the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “almost all of you” or “the majority of your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	2	6	d7b7	figs-extrainfo	τῶν πλειόνων	1		Here the phrase **the majority** implies a “minority.” These are some of the Corinthians who either did not agree with the **punishment** or who thought that the person had done nothing wrong. Paul does not give any information about this “minority,” however, so you should use a word or phrase that refers to most of the people in a group. Alternate translation: “all but a few of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2CO	2	6	a7c4	figs-explicit	ἱκανὸν	1	is enough	Here, the word **sufficient** could indicate that the **punishment**: (1) has been severe enough. Alternate translation: “is severe enough” or “is sufficiently strong” (2) has lasted long enough. Alternate translation: “has lasted long enough” or “can end now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	7	we1i	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	τοὐναντίον μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς χαρίσασθαι	1		Here, the words **on the contrary** and **rather** indicate that Paul wishes the Corinthians to do now the opposite of what they were doing. Instead of “punishing” the person, Paul wants them now to **forgive and comfort** the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that naturally indicate such a change in behavior. Alternate translation: “in contrast, you should instead forgive” or “instead of doing that, you should change your behavior and forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	2	7	w4n6	figs-gendernotations	παρακαλέσαι & τῇ	1		Here, just as in [2:5](../02/05.md), Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has “grieved” others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “comfort the individual … any” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	2	7	vpx1	figs-activepassive	μή πως τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ, καταποθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος	1	he is not overwhelmed by too much sorrow	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that excessive sorrow might not overwhelm such a person” or “so that such a person might not experience overwhelming and excessive sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	2	7	i3dm	figs-metaphor	μή πως τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ καταποθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος	1		Here Paul speaks as if a person could be **overwhelmed** or swallowed up by **sorrow**. He speaks in this way to indicate that a person can experience so much **sorrow** that it controls and destroys them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “so that such a person might not be overcome by excessive sorrow” or “so that such a person might not despair because of his excessive sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	2	7	me4y	writing-pronouns	ὁ τοιοῦτος	1		Here Paul speaks in general terms about **such a {person}**. However, he is referring more specifically to the person that he has already mentioned, the one who “grieved” the Corinthians (see [2:5](../02/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this reference more explicit. See how the translated this phrase in [2:6](../02/06.md). Alternate translation: “the person we are talking about” or “that individual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	2	7	cgil	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “as he is excessively sorrowful” or “because he is excessively sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	8	r916	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **So** introduces an exhortation that is based on what Paul said in the previous verse about “forgiving” and “comforting” the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “So then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	2	8	ii0x	figs-infostructure	κυρῶσαι εἰς αὐτὸν ἀγάπην	1		Here, the phrase **for him** could go with: (1) **love**. Alternate translation: “to reaffirm the love that you have for him” (2) **reaffirm**. Alternate translation: “to reaffirm to him your love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	2	8	yi2z	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς & ἀγάπην	1	publicly affirm your love for him	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “that you love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	8	vlmy	figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸν	1		Here, just as in [2:5](../02/05.md), [7](../02/07.md), Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has “grieved” others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “that individual” or “the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	2	9	oadd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **Indeed** introduces more information about the letter that Paul wrote to them (see [2:3–4](../02/03.md)). It does not identify a close link with the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **Indeed** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “As a matter of fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	2	9	lc78	figs-explicit	καὶ ἔγραψα	1		Here, the phrase **I also wrote** again refers to the letter that Paul sent to them before he wrote 2 Corinthians. See how you translated “I wrote” in [2:3–4](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “I also wrote that letter” or “I also sent that previous letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	9	pp4j	figs-doublet	εἰς τοῦτο & ἵνα	1		Here, the phrases **for this reason** and **so that** both introduce the purpose for which Paul **wrote** the previous letter. Paul uses this repetition to emphasize his purpose. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, and if it would not emphasize the purpose, you could combine the two phrases and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “so that” or “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2CO	2	9	eebj	translate-unknown	τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν	1		Here, the word **proof** refers primarily to the results of a test or trial. In this case, Paul is saying that he wants to **know** how they passed the test, which were the commands he included in the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the results of a test. Alternate translation: “how you responded to my commands” or “your character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	2	9	uzsx	figs-possession	τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **proof** that the Corinthians give or provide. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the prove you provide” or “the proof from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	2	9	gs2t	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **proof**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “prove.” Alternate translation: “what you would prove to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	9	xw5t	figs-explicit	ὑπήκοοί	1	you are obedient in everything	Here, Paul does not state to whom they are **obedient**. He could be implying that they are **obedient** to: (1) him as an apostle. Alternate translation: “obedient to me” (2) God and God’s commands. Alternate translation: “obedient to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	10	r7ib	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1		Here, the word **Now** introduces a development in Paul’s argument. In this case, Paul is concluding his discussion about the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development or a conclusion, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Finally,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	2	10	o14x	figs-explicit	ᾧ & τι χαρίζεσθε, κἀγώ	1		Here Paul could be making: (1) a specific statement about forgiving the person who “grieved” the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “to that person to whom you forgive anything, I also forgive” (2) a general concluding statement about forgiveness. Alternate translation: “to any person to whom you forgive anything, I also forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	10	uzvm	figs-ellipsis	κἀγώ	1		This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “I also forgive it” or “I also forgive them for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	2	10	tzn1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ γὰρ	1		Here, the phrase **for indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous clause (**for**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “further,” or “and in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	2	10	d9ah	figs-infostructure	καὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ ὃ κεχάρισμαι, εἴ τι κεχάρισμαι, δι’ ὑμᾶς	1		Here Paul includes the comment **if I have forgiven anything** in the middle of his sentence. Consider what may be a natural place to include extra information like this. Alternate translation: “for indeed, if I have forgiven anything, what I have forgiven is for your sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	2	10	avqv	figs-explicit	εἴ τι κεχάρισμαι	1		This clarification fits with what Paul said in [2:5](../02/05.md) about how the person did not “grieve” him but rather the Corinthians. Much like there, Paul could be saying that: (1) he does not have very much to forgive, since the person only hurt him a little. Alternate translation: “what little I had to forgive” (2) he really has nothing to forgive, since the person hurt the Corinthians, not him. Alternate translation: “although there was nothing to forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	10	cbm6		δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	forgiven for your sake	Here, the phrase **for your sake** could mean that: (1) Paul forgives the person to benefit or help the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “is for your benefit” (2) Paul forgives the person because the Corinthians forgave him. Alternate translation: “is because of you” or “is because you forgave”
2CO	2	10	b6uy	figs-explicit	ἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **in the presence of Christ** could indicate that: (1) Paul forgives because he knows that **Christ** sees or knows what he does. So, he acts in a way that pleases **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as Christ desires” or “with Christ watching” (2) Paul forgives with **Christ** as witness. Alternate translation: “with Christ as witness” or “with Christ guaranteeing it” (3) Paul forgives as someone who represents **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as one who represents Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	10	nq4n	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **presence**, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to being close to or in front of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “in front of Christ” or “before Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	11	xaoc	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἵνα	1		Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul and Corinthians should “forgive” others (see [2:10](../02/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	2	11	xoaw	figs-activepassive	μὴ πλεονεκτηθῶμεν ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Satan would not take advantage of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	2	11	x3p2	translate-unknown	μὴ πλεονεκτηθῶμεν	1		Here, the phrase **taken advantage of** refers to when someone gains power or control over someone else, usually by using some area in which that person is weak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how someone gains power or control over someone else. Alternate translation: “we would not be exploited” or “we would not be dominated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	2	11	z6no	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the first half of verse about **Satan**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “because” or “inasmuch as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	2	11	m46t	figs-litotes	οὐ & αὐτοῦ τὰ νοήματα ἀγνοοῦμεν	1	For we are not ignorant of his plans	Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “we are fully aware of his schemes” or “we are very knowledgeable about his schemes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2CO	2	12	nh7u	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section. Paul has finished speaking about the person that he and the Corinthians should forgive. He now returns to the topic of his travel plans and why he has not visited the Corinthians (see [1:8–23](../01/08.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Moving on,” or “I wish to speak again about my journeys:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	2	12	l6vd	figs-go	ἐλθὼν & εἰς	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **having come to** refers to arriving in one place or city from another, in this case probably traveling on land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “having traveled to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2CO	2	12	c14o	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας & ἀνεῳγμένης	1		This clause gives information that contrasts with what Paul will say in the previous verse about how he left **Troas**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this contrast with a natural form. Alternate translation: “and although a door for the gospel of Christ had been opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	2	12	a1ti	figs-metaphor	εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης	1	a door for the gospel of Christ was opened to me in the Lord	Here Paul speaks of God providing opportunities for him to preach the **gospel** as if God were “opening” a **door** for the **Gospel**. The image is of God opening a door so that Paul can go in and preach the message about Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “and an opportunity to preach the gospel of Christ having been given to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	2	12	n9cr	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. In this case, Paul could be stating the the **Lord** did it, or he could be implying that “God” did it **in the Lord**. See the note about **in the Lord**. Alternate translation: “and the Lord having opened a door for the gospel of Christ for me” or “and God having opened a door for the Gospel of Christ for me in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	2	12	vtg5	figs-possession	τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that could: (1) be about **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the gospel concerning Christ” (2) belong to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “Christ’s gospel” or “the gospel from Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	2	12	fcf7	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe his union with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, shows that the **door** was **opened** to Paul: (1) by the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “by the Lord” (2) so that he could continue to serve in his union with the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “in my union with the Lord” or “so that I can do what the Lord wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	2	12	m7x6	figs-explicit	Κυρίῳ	1		Here, the word **Lord** could refer to: (1) Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Lord, the Messiah” (2) God generally. Alternate translation: “the Lord God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	13	rjy9	figs-idiom	οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου	1	I had no relief in my spirit	Here, the clause **I had no relief in my spirit** indicates that Paul was anxious or concerned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable form or plain language. Alternate translation: “my mind could not rest” or “I was concerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	2	13	k7k9	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου	1		Here Paul does not clarify what he was concerned or anxious about. He clarifies later in [7:5–16](../07/05.md) that he was anxious to know how Titus’ visit to the Corinthians went. The Corinthians would have made this inference, since Titus had already visited them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “I had no relief in my spirit about Titus’ visit to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	13	trp2	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **relief**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “restful” or “relieved.” Alternate translation: “my spirit was not restful” or “my spirit was not relieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	13	w79i	figs-explicit	μὴ εὑρεῖν με Τίτον τὸν ἀδελφόν μου	1		Here Paul is stating that **Titus** was not in Troas, not that he simply could not find him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that shows that **Titus** was not in the city of Troas when Paul visited there. Alternate translation: “as I found out that my brother Titus was not there” or “as my brother Titus was not in the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	13	xd5h	figs-metaphor	Τίτον τὸν ἀδελφόν μου	1	my brother Titus	Here Paul speaks of **Titus** as if he were his **brother** (probably a younger **brother**). He speaks in this way to indicate that **Titus** is a fellow believer and that he and Paul are as close as if they they were brothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or plain language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “Titus, who is like my own brother,” or “my very dear friend and fellow believer Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	2	13	wq6j	figs-explicit	ἀποταξάμενος αὐτοῖς	1	So I left them	Here Paul refers to how he **said farewell** to the people from Troas, but he also means that he left their city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having said farewell to them and departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	13	j9je	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1		Here, the word **them** refers to the friends that Paul made in the city of “Troas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)). Most likely, these people were fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom **them** refers more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the people from Troas” or “to my friends in Troas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	2	13	gxp2	figs-go	ἐξῆλθον εἰς	1		Here, the phrase **went on to** refers to travel in which a person leaves one area and goes to another area. Use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “I departed from there to go to” or “I went from there to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2CO	2	14	s6k3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word **But** introduces a new section. Paul will not speak again about Titus and his travel plans until [7:5](../07/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section or topic, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “But now,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	2	14	g39s	figs-idiom	τῷ & Θεῷ χάρις	1		Here, the phrase **thanks {be} to God** is a way to indicate that one is praising God for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a normal way in your language to thank or praise someone for what that person has done. Alternate translation: “we thank God” or “we give glory to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	2	14	qgok	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς & ἡμῶν	1		Here, the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach … us” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	2	14	gpd2	figs-metaphor	τῷ πάντοτε θριαμβεύοντι ἡμᾶς	1	God, who in Christ always leads us in triumph	Here Paul speaks as if **God** were a leader who had won a victory and set up a parade or **triumphal procession** to celebrate. In this parade, Paul and those with him could be either or both of the following: (1) prisoners who have been conquered and who are put in the parade to illustrate the victory. This is the normal meaning of the word in other places. Alternate translation: “always parading us as his captives” or “always showing that he leads us” (2) soldiers who helped win the victory and who are celebrating. This is not the normal meaning of the word, but it is possible and fits the context well. Alternate translation: “always having us participate in his triumphal parade” or “always helping us to conquer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	2	14	so2k	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains why or how they are involved in the **triumphal procession**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that union with Christ is the reason or the means for participating in the **procession**. Alternate translation: “because of our union with Christ” or “by means of our union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	2	14	l1nr	figs-exmetaphor	τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ, φανεροῦντι δι’ ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ	1	Through us he spreads the sweet aroma of the knowledge of him everywhere	Here Paul speaks as if **the knowledge of him** were an **aroma**, a smell or odor. In this case, the context implies that this is a pleasing or good smell. He speaks in this way to indicate that everyone hears and reacts to the message about Christ, just like everyone smells and reacts to a strong odor. Also, just like a smell fills a whole room, so the good news fills **every place** on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a simile or plain language. Consider using a form that you can continue to use in the following two verse, in which Paul continues the **aroma** metaphor. Alternate translation: “making known through us and in every place the knowledge of him, which is like an good smell” or “powerfully revealing through us the knowledge of him, which is spreading into every place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2CO	2	14	tlqe	figs-possession	τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **aroma** that is **knowledge**. In other words, the possessive indicates what the **aroma** stands for. Then, Paul indicates that this **knowledge** is about **him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the aroma, which is knowledge about him” or “the aroma, that is, knowing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	2	14	ihbw	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “that is knowing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	14	lxlc	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the word **him** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “of God” (2) Christ specifically. Alternate translation: “of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	2	14	eq21	figs-hyperbole	ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ	1	he spreads … everywhere	Here Paul speaks as if God used him and those with him to make God known **in every place**. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that God uses them to make God known in many places, or in every place that they visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea clearer. Alternate translation: “in every place we go” or “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2CO	2	15	cjjj	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1		Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse about “the aroma” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Here is what I mean:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	2	15	yfx6	figs-exclusive	ἐσμὲν	1		Here, just as in [2:14](../02/14.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	2	15	x6nn	figs-exmetaphor	Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ	1	we are to God the sweet aroma of Christ	Here Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:14](../02/14.md)). Here, he identifies himself and those with him as a **fragrance** that comes from **Christ** and which goes toward **God**. By speaking in this way, he shows that **we** are those who represent or declare who Christ is in the presence of God. Just like everyone smells a good smell and knows where it comes from, so everyone notices Paul and those with him and realizes that they represent **Christ** before **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Make sure that your translation fits with the previous and the following verses. Alternate translation: “we are like a good odor that spreads from Christ before God” or “we represent Christ before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2CO	2	15	b1k1	figs-possession	Χριστοῦ εὐωδία	1	the sweet aroma of Christ	Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the **fragrance** could: (1) come or spread from **Christ**. Alternate translation: “a fragrance from Christ” (2) be presented or offered by **Christ**. Alternate translation: “a fragrance that Christ presents” or “a fragrance that Christ offers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	2	15	itc8	figs-activepassive	τοῖς σῳζομένοις	1	those who are saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	2	15	ze7n	figs-extrainfo	τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις	1		Christians disagree over whether God causes people to “perish” or whether people cause themselves to “perish.” The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the **perishing**. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the “perishing.” Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2CO	2	16	zrae	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οἷς μὲν & οἷς δὲ	1		Here, the word **indeed** indicates that the author is introducing the first of two parts. The word **but** introduces the second part. The author uses this form to contrast “the ones perishing” and “the ones being saved” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally contrasts two groups of people. Alternate translation: “on one hand, to the ones … but on the other hand, to the others” or “to the ones … but to the others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	2	16	pv6o	figs-infostructure	οἷς μὲν ὀσμὴ ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον, οἷς δὲ ὀσμὴ ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν	1		Here Paul refers to “the ones perishing” before he refers to “the ones being saved,” which is the opposite of the order he used in [2:15](../02/15.md). This was good style in his culture. If reversing the order from [2:15](../02/15.md) would be confusing for your readers, and if it would not be good style, you could reverse the order here to match that in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “to the ones indeed, an aroma from life to life, but to the others, an aroma from death to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	2	16	t3vw	writing-pronouns	οἷς	-1		Here, the phrase **to the ones** refers to “the ones perishing,” and the phrase **to the {others}** refers to “the ones being saved” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to whom these phrases refer. Alternate translation: “to the latter … to the former” or “to the ones perishing … to the ones being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	2	16	dwk6	figs-exmetaphor	ὀσμὴ	-1	an aroma	Here Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:14–15](../02/14.md)). He specifically explains what kind of **aroma** he and those with him are. Those who do not believe think that the **aroma** smells bad, while those who do believe think that the **aroma** smells good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Make sure that your translation fits with how you translated the “smelling” language in [2:14–15](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “we smell like an aroma … we smell like an aroma” or “our message is … our message is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2CO	2	16	ud2u	figs-idiom	ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον & ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν	1	an aroma from death to death	Here Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word. He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the **aroma**, and **to** indicates the effects of the **aroma**. Alternate translation: “that smells like death and leads to death … that smells like life and leads to life” or “of death causing death … of life causing life” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the **aroma** is characterized completely by either **death** or **life**. Alternate translation: “of death … of life” or “characterized completely by death … characterized completely by life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	2	16	yau5	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον & ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **death** and **life**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live” or adjectives such as “dead” and “alive.” Make sure your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “that comes from something dying and that leads to people dying … that comes from something living and leads to people living” or “that smells like something dead … that smells like something alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	16	cdr3	writing-pronouns	πρὸς ταῦτα	1	a fragrance from life to life	Here, the phrase **these things** refers back to what those who proclaim the good news must do, things that Paul has outlined in [2:14–16](../02/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **these things** refers to. Alternate translation: “to do what I have said” or “to preach the gospel like this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	2	16	be6x	figs-rquestion	πρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός?	1	who is worthy of these things?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question could imply that the answer is that: (1) no one is **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, nobody is sufficient!” (2) Paul and those with him are **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, we are indeed sufficient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	2	17	h7y1	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a basis or proof for why he and those with him are not “sufficient,” as the previous question implied (see [2:16](../02/16.md)). Alternate translation: “You can tell that we are not sufficient because” (2) an answer to the previous question that indicates that Paul and those with him are “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “But we are sufficient, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	2	17	pmpz	figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν & λαλοῦμεν	1		Here, just as in [2:14–15](../02/14.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are … we speak” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … I speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	2	17	a5sa	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	who sell the word of God	Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	2	17	u7ui	figs-nominaladj	οἱ πολλοὶ	1		Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2CO	2	17	yf8u	translate-unknown	καπηλεύοντες	1		Here, the word **peddling** refers to the practice of selling goods that one has. The word implies that the person who is **peddling** is trying to make as much profit as they can, both by honest and deceitful means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to selling something for as much money as possible. Alternate translation: “trading in” or “selling off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	2	17	ohh8	figs-possession	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the word** that could be: (1) from **God**. Alternate translation: “the word from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	2	17	u4iy	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’ ὡς	-1		Here Paul uses **but as** to introduce a contrast with **the many** who “peddle” God’s word. Paul repeats **but as** to continue and emphasize this contrast, not to contrast **sincerity** and **from God**. If the repetition of **but as** would be confusing, you could use **but as** once and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “but instead as … and even more as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	2	17	x86y	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ εἰλικρινείας	1	sincerity	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sincerity**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sincere.” Alternate translation: “those who are sincere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	17	f9x4	figs-explicit	ὡς ἐκ Θεοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **as from God** indicates that God sent Paul and those with him to **speak** the gospel. The word **as** indicates how they **speak**. It does not mean that they are not really **from God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as those whom God has sent” or “as ones sent by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	17	aizg	figs-explicit	λαλοῦμεν	1		Here, Paul implies that they are speaking **the word of God** that he already mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what they **speak** more explicit. Alternate translation: “we speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	17	vpdc	figs-explicit	κατέναντι Θεοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **in the presence of God** could indicate that: (1) they **speak** as they do because they know that **God** sees or knows what they do. So, they speak in a way that pleases **God**. Alternate translation: “as God desires” or “with God watching” (2) they **speak** with **God** as a witness guaranteeing what they say. Alternate translation: “with God as witness” or “with God guaranteeing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	2	17	q4dc	figs-abstractnouns	κατέναντι Θεοῦ	1	before God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **presence**, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to being close to or in front of **God**. Alternate translation: “in front of God” or “before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	2	17	u2zb	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	we speak in Christ	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains how they **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that they **speak** as those who are united to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as Christians” or “as those united to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	1	mdwx	figs-exclusive	ἀρχόμεθα & ἑαυτοὺς & μὴ χρῄζομεν	1		Here, just as in [2:14–15](../02/14.md), [17](../02/17.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “Are we who preach beginning … ourselves … we do not need … do we” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “Am I beginning … myself … I do not need … do I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	3	intro	f7rh			0		# 2 Corinthians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)<br>      * Qualification for ministry (3:1–6)<br>      * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Letters of recommendation<br><br>In [3:1–3](../03/01.md), Paul refers to “letters of recommendation.” These were letters that a person carried with them when they traveled to a new place. Someone that the traveler knew would write down that the traveler could be trusted and should be welcomed, and the traveler would give this letter to people that he or she visited. If something like this is not a common practice in your culture, you may need to explain it for your readers in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/letter]])<br><br>### Letter and Spirit<br><br>In [3:6–8](../03/06.md), Paul contrasts “letter” and “Spirit.” In these verses, the word “letter” refers to the letters in the alphabet, and the word “Spirit” refers to the Holy Spirit. Paul’s point is that whatever is characterized by the “letter” is something that is only written down and does not have any power. Whatever is characterized by the “Spirit” has power and can change people. Although it also might be written down, the “Spirit” gives it power. Paul uses this contrast to describe one of the differences between the old covenant (“letter”) and the new covenant (“Spirit”). Consider a natural way to express this contrast in your language. <br><br>### Glory<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks extensively of “glory.” He indicates that the old covenant and ministry had glory, but the new covenant and ministry have much more glory. The word “glory” refers to how great, powerful, and amazing someone or something is. Consider what term will express this idea throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])<br><br>### Veiling of the glory on Moses’ face<br><br>In [3:7](../03/07.md), [13](../03/13.md), Paul refers to a story about what happened when Moses received the Ten Commandments from God. Because he met God and spoke with him, Moses’ face became bright or shining. Because of that, Moses would cover his face with a veil or cloth after he spoke with God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). Paul also notes that the brightness or “glory” on Moses’ face would fade away. This detail cannot be found directly in the story in Exodus. Paul either inferred it from the story, or it was tradition to say that the “glory” faded away. If your readers would not understand what Paul refers to in these verses, you could include a footnote or explanatory information. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/veil]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The Corinthians as a letter of recommendation<br><br>In [3:2–3](../03/02.md), Paul describes the Corinthians as a letter of recommendation for him and those with him. He speaks in this way because anyone who knows the Corinthians will know that they believed because of Paul and those who worked with him. In this way, the Corinthians “recommend” Paul as a true apostle of Jesus. If possible preserve the metaphor of a letter of recommendation or express the idea with a simile. <br><br>### The “veil”<br><br>After he introduces how Moses put an actual “veil” over his face, Paul begins to use the word “veil” and related words in figurative ways (see [3:14–18](../03/14.md)). He claims that people who are not united to Christ cannot understand the Old Testament, and he describes this as a “veil” that covers their hearts. In other words, just as the Israelites could not see the glory on Moses’ face, so anyone who hears the Old Testament without believing in Jesus cannot fully understand it. However, Paul says that this “veil” is taken away when someone believes in Jesus. Because of that, those who believe have no “veil” and can reflect God’s glory even more than Moses’ did. This is a complex figure of speech that connects directly to the story about Moses and his veil. Because of that, it is important to preserve the “veil” language. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking figuratively, you could use a simile to express the idea. <br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “The Lord is the Spirit”<br><br>In [3:17](../03/17.md), Paul states that “the Lord is the Spirit.” Scholars have understood this sentence in three primary ways. First, Paul could be defining who he meant when he referred to “the Lord” in the previous verse ([3:16](../03/16.md)). Second, Paul could be stating that the way that believers experience “the Lord” is as the Holy Spirit. Third, Paul could be stating that “the Lord” is a spirit or is spiritual. It is most likely true that Paul is defining who “the Lord” he has referred to is, so it is recommended that you follow the first option. See the notes on this verse for translation possibilities.
2CO	3	1	um8x	figs-rquestion	ἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν?	1	Are we beginning to praise ourselves again?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “no, we are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not beginning to commend ourselves again!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	3	1	ogwa	translate-unknown	ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν	1		Here, phrase **commend ourselves** refers to the practice of stating why one should be trusted and welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to giving reasons why people should welcome and trust a person. Alternate translation: “to speak favorably of ourselves” or “to vouch for ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	3	1	fuds	figs-explicit	πάλιν	1		Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	1	noiz	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἢ	1		The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul asked in the first question. In that question, he implied that they were not “commending” themselves again. With **Or**, then, Paul asks a question that introduces the incorrect alternative: they might need **letters of recommendation**. He introduces this incorrect alternate to show that the implication of his first question is true: they are not “commending” themselves again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “Quite the contrary:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	3	1	y8yc	figs-rquestion	ἢ μὴ χρῄζομεν, ὥς τινες, συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἢ ἐξ ὑμῶν?	1	We do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people, do we?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “we do not need them.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “In fact, we certainly do not need, like some, letters of recommendation to you or from you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	3	1	syny	writing-pronouns	ὥς τινες	1		Here, the word **some** refers generally to other people besides Paul and those with him. Paul may more specifically have in mind the people who opposed him in Corinth, but he does not make this explicit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to other people besides Paul and those who serve with him. Alternate translation: “like some others” or “like some people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	3	1	ad1u	figs-possession	συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν	1	letters of recommendation	Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to **letters** that gave a **recommendation** for the person who had the letter. Many people in Paul’s culture would ask friends to write these letters, and then they would show the letters to people they visited to prove that they were trustworthy and could be welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally refers to this kind of letter. Alternate translation: “reference letters” or “letters of introduction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	1	dygq	figs-abstractnouns	συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **recommendation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “recommend.” Alternate translation: “letters that recommend us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	2	ty59	figs-metaphor	ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	You yourselves are our letter of recommendation	Here Paul continues to speak about “letters,” but now he tells the Corinthians that they are the **letter** of recommendation for Paul and those with him. This **letter** is not a physical document, but is **written** in their **hearts**, and **all men** can **read** it. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that the recommendation he relies on is the Corinthian believers. In other words, the fact that they believe and that they are close with Paul (**in our hearts**) shows that Paul is trustworthy and a true apostle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “You yourselves are like our letter of recommendation, which you wrote on us and that is known and read by all men” or “We do not need a letter of recommendation because you yourselves are the recommendation that is in our hearts and that is known and understood by all men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	2	f8s8	figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς ἐστε	1		Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **You**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **You** in your language. Alternate translation: “You indeed are” or “It is you who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2CO	3	2	a7xl	figs-exclusive	ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν & ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1		Here, just as in [3:1](../03/01.md), the word **our** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “the letter for us who preach the gospel … our hearts” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “my letter … my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	3	2	ygx8	figs-possession	ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν & ἐνγεγραμμένη	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **letter** that could: (1) recommend “us.” Alternate translation: “the letter for us written” or “a letter that recommends us written” (2) be written by “us.” Alternate translation: “a letter written by us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	2	v2e7	figs-metonymy	ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	written on our hearts	In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that the recommendation from the Corinthians is not written down on paper but is rather part of their relationship with Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “written inside us” or “expressed by our relationship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	3	2	ko7w	figs-activepassive	ἐνγεγραμμένη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul states in the following verse that “Christ” did it (see [3:3](../03/03.md)). Alternate translation: “that Christ has written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	3	2	bu1u	figs-activepassive	γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	written on our hearts	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which all men know and read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	3	2	pzpz	figs-doublet	γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη	1		Here, the words **known** and **read** express very similar ideas. It is likely that **known** indicates that people are aware that there is a **letter**, while **read** indicates that they know what the **letter** says. If you do not have words that express these distinctions, and if the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could express the idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “read” or “noticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2CO	3	2	dr5k	figs-gendernotations	πάντων ἀνθρώπων	1	known and read by all people	Although the word **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to all people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “every person” or “all men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	3	3	s717	figs-explicit	φανερούμενοι	1	you are a letter from Christ	Here, the phrase **making known** could: (1) indicate that something is well-known or obvious to people. Alternate translation: “being clear” or “so it is evident” (2) state that the Corinthians show or reveal something to others. Alternate translation: “you making it clear” or “you revealing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	3	aylw	figs-metaphor	ἐστὲ ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ, διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν, ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις	1		Here Paul continues to speak as if the Corinthians were a **letter**. Here, he states that this **letter** was written by **Christ** and **administered** by Paul and those with him. What he means by this is that **Christ** is the one who enabled the Corinthians to believe, and he worked through Paul and those with him to do that. Paul then contrasts a **letter** written with **ink** and on **tablets of stone** with a **letter** written by the power of the **Spirit** and on **hearts of flesh**. What he means by this is that the letter is the Corinthians, not some written document, and that the message is communicated by the **Spirit**, not by letters written with **ink**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “you are like a letter of Christ having been administered by us, not written with ink but as if with the Spirit of the living God, not on tablets of stone but as if on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “you are a message from Christ having been administered by us, not communicated by ink but by the Spirit of the living God, not presented on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	3	hlap	figs-possession	ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the **letter** is from or written by **Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “a letter from Christ” or “a letter written by Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	3	wrk4	figs-activepassive	διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν	1	cared for by us	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we have administered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	3	3	dsxa	translate-unknown	διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν	1		Here, the phrase **having been administered by us** could indicate that: (1) “we” delivered the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been delivered by us” or “having been sent by us” (2) “we” helped **Christ** compose the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been composed with our help” or “that we wrote down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	3	3	bfsl	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1		Here, just as in [3:1–2](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	3	3	akc6	figs-infostructure	ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις	1		If your language would not put the negative statements before the positive statements, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “written with the Spirit of the living God, not with ink, on tablets of hearts of flesh, not on tablets of stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	3	3	vyuh	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις	1		These phrases leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word **written** from earlier in the sentence in some or all of the phrases. Alternate translation: “but written with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but written on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “but with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	3	3	q96q	figs-activepassive	ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ	1	It was written not with ink … on tablets of human hearts	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “Christ” did it. Alternate translation: “which Christ wrote not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	3	3	qt5g	translate-unknown	μέλανι	1	It was written not with ink but by the Spirit of the living God	Here, the word **ink** refers to liquid that people in Paul’s culture used to write letters and words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever term naturally refers to what people use to write letters and words. Alternate translation: “with a pen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	3	3	t5ah	figs-idiom	Θεοῦ ζῶντος	1	not on tablets of stone, but on tablets of human hearts	Here, the phrase **living God** identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that **God** actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	3	3	ana2	translate-unknown	ἐν πλαξὶν	-1		Here, the word **tablets** refers to thin, flat pieces of stone on which people would write words, especially important words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to what people use to write something important on. Paul may be referring here to the **tablets** on which Moses wrote God’s commandments (see [Exodus 34:1–4](../exo/34/01.md)), so if possible use a word that could refer to those **tablets**. Alternate translation: “on flat pieces … on flat pieces” or “on plaques … on plaques” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	3	3	ih89	figs-possession	πλαξὶν λιθίναις	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **tablets** that are made out of **stone**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “stone tablets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	3	u959	figs-possession	πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις	1	tablets of human hearts	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **tablets** that refer to **hearts** that are made of **flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “tablets that are fleshly hearts” or “tablets that are hearts made of flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	3	no25	figs-metonymy	καρδίαις σαρκίναις	1		In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. Here Paul states that these **hearts** are made of **flesh**, which means that they are alive and can function. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of living people” or “of what we think and do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	3	4	pyev	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word **Now** introduces a development in the argument. Here it indicates that Paul is moving on to a slightly different topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces a development in the argument, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	3	4	wy6e	figs-exclusive	ἔχομεν	1		Here, just as in [3:1–3](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel have” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	3	4	z7qx	figs-abstractnouns	πεποίθησιν & τοιαύτην ἔχομεν	1	such confidence	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “we are confident in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	4	q0kr	writing-pronouns	πεποίθησιν & τοιαύτην	1		Here, the word **such** indicates that the **confidence** is the kind that Paul showed in the previous verses, especially in [3:1–3](../03/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that **such** refers back to what Paul has said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “that kind of confidence” or “confidence in those ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	3	4	y72k	figs-explicit	πρὸς τὸν Θεόν	1		Here, the phrase **toward God** could indicate that the **confidence** is: (1) before or in the presence of **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God approves of him and those with him. Alternate translation: “with regard to God” (2) in **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God will do what he has promised. Alternate translation: “in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	5	knf2	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οὐχ	1		Here, the word **Not** introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about **confidence** (see [3:4](../03/04.md)). He wishes to clarify that the **confidence** is not based on themselves but on **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But it is not” or “However, it is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	3	5	i7nt	figs-exclusive	ἑαυτῶν & ἐσμεν & ἑαυτῶν & ἡμῶν	1		Here, just as in [3:1–4](../03/01.md), the words **we**, **ourselves**, and **our** do not include the Corinthians. They could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel are … ourselves … ourselves … our” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … myself … myself … my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	3	5	qye9	figs-explicit	ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν ἱκανοί & ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν	1	competent in ourselves	Here Paul does not state what they are not **sufficient** to do. He implies that it is serving God by preaching the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sufficient from ourselves to preach the gospel … our sufficiency for this task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	5	e5e7		ἑαυτῶν & λογίσασθαί	1	to consider anything as coming from us	Here, the phrase **to consider** introduces an explanation or elaboration of what **sufficient from ourselves** means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or elaboration. Alternate translation: “ourselves, that is, we do not consider” or “ourselves, so that we consider”
2CO	3	5	tws9	figs-explicit	τι	1		Here, the word **anything** refers to whatever they do to serve God well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “anything we do preach the gospel” or “whatever we do well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	5	wi1t	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	our competence is from God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sufficiency**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “God makes us sufficient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	6	t785	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς διακόνους	1		Here, just as in [3:1–5](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach the gospel … as servants” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … as a servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	3	6	r5ea	figs-possession	διακόνους καινῆς διαθήκης	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify himself and those with him as **servants** who “serve” for the benefit of **a new covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “as those who serve a new covenant” or “as servants who administer a new covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	6	j8rd	figs-infostructure	οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος	1		If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit, not of the letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	3	6	poyq	figs-explicit	οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος	1		When Paul contrasts **letter** and **Spirit**, he implies that **letter** describes the old covenant and **Spirit** describes the new covenant. What he means is that the old covenant was only written down and could not change people on the inside. On the other hand, the new covenant is empowered by the Holy **Spirit**, who can change people on the inside. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “not a covenant of the letter that is powerless, but a covenant of the powerful Spirit” or “not one that is only written down but one that the Spirit puts inside people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	6	dp6i	figs-metonymy	γράμματος & τὸ & γράμμα	1	a new covenant, not of the letter	Here, the word **letter** refers generally to a message written in “letters.” More specifically, Paul uses the word **letter** to refer to the old covenant, which was written down only and could not change people like the **Spirit** can. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a message written in “letters”. Alternate translation: “in written form … what was written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	3	6	bdrz	figs-possession	γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **covenant** that is given or mediated by the **Spirit**, not by the **letter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “in letters but by the Spirit” or “mediated by letter but by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	6	tc4u	figs-explicit	Πνεύματος & τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα	1	but of the Spirit	Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit … but God’s Spirit” (2) the “spirit” of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit … but the spirit” or “of the heart … but the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	6	q4at	figs-personification	τὸ & γράμμα ἀποκτέννει	1	the letter kills	Here Paul speaks as if **the letter** were a person who **kills** others. He speaks in this way to indicate that **the letter** (which refers to the old covenant and its regulations) does not have the power to give life but instead can only condemn people to die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “the letter is like someone who kills” or “the letter dooms people to die” or “the letter causes death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2CO	3	7	lyf7	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	3	7	yzhq	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry** of **death** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	3	7	rife	figs-possession	ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that leads to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	7	du65	figs-explicit	ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου	1	the ministry that produced death	Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how Moses “administered” the old covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of this death” or “the act of ministering that led to death” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the old covenant or its laws. Alternate translation: “the system of this death” or “the laws that led to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	7	ut6r	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου	1	Now if the ministry that produced death … came in such glory	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ministry** and **death**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “administer” and “die.” Alternate translation: “the old covenant, which was administered in a way that causes people die” or “what was administered, which caused people to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	7	j1hp	figs-activepassive	ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις	1	engraved in letters on stones	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it (see also [Exodus 34:1](../exo/34/01.md)). Alternate translation: “which God engraved in letters on stones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	3	7	rx13	figs-explicit	ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις	1		Here Paul refers to how God **engraved** or carved the regulations for the **ministry** on **stones** or tablets. Much like in the previous verse, **letters** refers to the alphabet, so the point is that God used writing. Paul is probably referring to the story about how Moses met God on a mountain, and God carved the regulations of the covenant on two pieces of stone. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:1–28](../exo/34/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “engraved in writing by God onto two stone slabs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	7	r5p5	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγενήθη ἐν δόξῃ	1	in such glory	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “was very great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	7	myms	figs-explicit	ὥστε μὴ δύνασθαι ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον Μωϋσέως, διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην	1		Here Paul refers to a story about what happened after God **engraved** the stone tablets. When Moses returned to talk to the Israelites, his face shone brightly because he had been talking to God. In other words, some of God’s **glory** became part of Moses’ **face**, and the Israelites could not **look intently** at his face because it was a little like looking at God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or include a footnote explaining the story. Alternate translation: “so that the sons of Israel were not able to look carefully at the face of Moses because of the fading glory on his face that came from talking with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	7	s9zp	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς υἱοὺς	1		Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	3	7	mh54	translate-kinship	τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ	1		Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
2CO	3	7	enwt		διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην	1		Here, the reason why the Israelites **were not able to look intently** at Moses’ face could be that: (1) Moses’ face was very “glorious.” Alternate translation: “because of the glory of his face, even though it was fading” (2) the **glory of his face** was **fading**. Alternate translation: “because the glory of his face was fading”
2CO	3	7	pqbi	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “how his face was shining, even though that was fading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	7	ewkr	figs-explicit	τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην	1		Here, the word **fading** could describe: (1) the **glory** of Moses’ **face**. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face that faded” (2) the **ministry of this death**. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face, although that ministry was fading away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	8	xxn6	figs-rquestion	πῶς οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔσται ἐν δόξῃ?	1	Will the ministry of the Spirit not be with much more glory?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “yes, it has much more glory.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “then the ministry of the Spirit will certainly be with much more glory.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	3	8	wkvl	figs-pastforfuture	οὐχὶ & ἔσται	1		Here Paul could use the future tense because: (1) he is stating an inference from something in the past, so the inference is future. Paul does not mean that the **ministry** will only have **glory** in the future. Alternate translation: “then is … not” (2) he is stating that the **ministry** will have **glory** in the future. He could mean that it only has **glory** in the future, or he could mean that it has **glory** in the present and will also have **glory** in the future. Alternate translation: “will … in the future not be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2CO	3	8	wq1v	figs-possession	ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	the ministry of the Spirit	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the ministry** that could: (1) lead to people receiving the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry that provides the Spirit” or “the ministry that leads to the Spirit” (2) be accomplished by the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry worked by the Spirit” or “the ministry accomplished by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	8	dhs5	figs-explicit	ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how Paul and those with him “administered” the new covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of the Spirit” or “the act of ministering that leads to the Spirit” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the new covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of the Spirit” or “the principles that lead to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	8	o30n	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **ministry**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “administer.” See how you translated this word in [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “the new covenant, which was administered in a way that brought the Spirit,” or “what was administered, which gave the Spirit,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	8	bmme	figs-explicit	τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit” (2) the “spirit” of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit” or “of the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	8	tcp5	figs-abstractnouns	μᾶλλον & ἐν δόξῃ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **imitators**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “much more great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	9	m2ci	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of what Paul has said about the two “ministries” in [3:7–8](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Even more,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	3	9	p7p5	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry of this condemnation** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	3	9	ufq6	figs-explicit	τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως & ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1	the ministry of righteousness	Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how people “administered” the the two covenants. Alternate translation: “the service of this condemnation … the service of this righteousness” or “the act of ministering that leads to this condemnation … the act of ministering that leads to this righteousness” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to a covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of this condemnation … the system of this righteousness” or “the law that leads to condemnation … the principle that leads to righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	9	k779	figs-possession	τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως	1	the ministry of condemnation	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **condemnation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this condemnation” or “the ministry that ended in this condemnation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	9	tcxw	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως, δόξα	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ministry**, **condemnation**, and **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the old covenant, which was administered in a way that caused people to be condemned, was great,” or “what was administered that led to people being condemned was glorious,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	9	if33	figs-exclamations	πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ	1	how much more does the ministry of righteousness abound in glory!	Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two “ministries.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two “ministries.” Alternate translation: “then certainly much more the ministry of this righteousness abounds in glory.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2CO	3	9	egmy	figs-possession	ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this righteousness” or “the ministry that ended in this righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	9	e5zz	figs-abstractnouns	πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ.	1	the ministry of righteousness abound in glory	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ministry**, **righteousness**, and **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the new covenant, which is administered in a way that makes people righteous, is even more great,” or “what is administered that leads to people being righteous is even more glorious,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	10	q8bg	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ γὰρ	1		Here, the phrase **for indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said about **glory** in [3:7–9](../03/07.md) (**for**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “And in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	3	10	n4pe	figs-explicit	τὸ δεδοξασμένον & τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης	1	that which was once made glorious is no longer glorious … because of the glory that exceeds it	Here, the phrase **{what} had been glorified** refers to the old covenant that God gave through Moses. The phrase **surpassing glory** refers to the new covenant that Paul and those with him serve. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these phrases refer to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that was glorified … the surpassing glory of the new covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	10	t2dq	figs-activepassive	οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον	1	that which was once made glorious	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the “glorifying,” since Paul is focusing on the fact of “glory” rather than on the action of becoming “glorious.” Alternate translation: “what had glory does not have glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	3	10	hmcu	figs-infostructure	οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει	1		Here, the phrase **in this part** could modify: (1) in what way the old covenant is **not glorified**. In other words, **in this part** introduces the way in which something that has **been glorified** can actually be **not glorified**. Alternate translation: “what had been glorified is not glorified, and here is why:” or “what had been glorified is not glorified in this way” (2) **{what} had been glorified**. In other words, the old covenant was **glorified** only “partially.” Alternate translation: “what had been glorified in part is not glorified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	3	10	es4c	figs-idiom	ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει	1		Here, the phrase **in this part** indicates that a statement is only true in **part** or in some specific way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the qualification that some statement or action is partially true or accurate. Alternate translation: “in a sense” or “in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	3	10	d7k5	figs-doublet	ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει εἵνεκεν	1	in this respect	Here, the phrase **in this part** and the word **because** both introduce how or why **{what} had been glorified** is **not glorified**. Paul uses both elements because he wants to make his point very clear. If the repetition would not make the point clearer, and if using both elements would be confusing in your language, you could use one word or phrase that introduces how what was **glorified** is **not glorified**. Alternate translation: “because of” or “in comparison to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2CO	3	10	pvbx	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “what was much more glorious” or “what was even greater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	10	f2mo		τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης	1		Alternate translation: “the glory that surpasses it”
2CO	3	11	grwl	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of the comparison between the two covenants and their **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “As it is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	3	11	r7c9	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ	1		Paul is speaking as if the **glory** of **{what} is fading away** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	3	11	ym37		τὸ καταργούμενον	1		Here, the words translated **{what} is fading away** could indicate: (1) that something is disappearing or temporary without stating that anyone is making it disappear. Alternate translation: “what is passing away” (2) that God is causing something to disappear or pass away. Alternate translation: “what is being abolished” or “what God is abolishing”
2CO	3	11	zwb2	figs-metaphor	τὸ καταργούμενον	1	that which was fading away	Here, the phrase **fading away** translates the same word that Paul used in [3:7](../03/07.md) to refer to how the glory was “fading” from Moses’ face. Paul means that, just like the glory on Moses’ face was temporary, so the old covenant that God made through Moses was temporary. See how you translated this idea in [3:7](../03/07.md) and use similar language if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a simile. Alternate translation: “what is temporary” or “what is fading, like the glory on Moses’ face,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	11	hm9d	figs-explicit	τὸ καταργούμενον & τὸ μένον	1		Here, the phrase **{what} is fading away** refers to the old covenant, while the phrase **{what} remains** refers to the new covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what these phrases refer to. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that is fading away … the new covenant that remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	11	wtht	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ δόξης & ἐν δόξῃ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great” or an adverb such as “gloriously.” Alternate translation: “was great … is great” or “came gloriously … will come gloriously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	11	wrf4	figs-exclamations	πολλῷ μᾶλλον τὸ μένον ἐν δόξῃ	1		Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two covenants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two covenants. Alternate translation: “then certainly much more what remains will come with glory.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2CO	3	12	tnc1	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Since we have such a hope	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he has said about the ministry of “glory” in [3:4–11](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “Because of this ministry of glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	3	12	ib35	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔχοντες	1		Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him **act with much boldness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	3	12	j76k	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχοντες & τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hope**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “hope” or an adjective such as “hopeful.” Alternate translation: “being hopeful in such a way” or “hoping in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	12	u5qa	writing-pronouns	τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα	1	such a hope	Here, the word **such** refers to back to what Paul has said about the “glory” of the ministry in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). In other words, the **hope** is based on the glorious ministry and covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **such** refers to. Alternate translation: “that kind of hope” or “hope in such a covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	3	12	rf9h	figs-exclusive	χρώμεθα	1		Here, just as in [3:1–6](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	3	12	zbff	figs-explicit	χρώμεθα	1		Here Paul does not exactly what it is that **we** do. He implies that it is the “ministry” that he has referred to in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **we** do more explicit. Alternate translation: “we perform the ministry” or “we proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	12	b5ql	figs-abstractnouns	πολλῇ παρρησίᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **boldness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “bold” or an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “as very bold people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	13	fb59	figs-explicit	καὶ οὐ καθάπερ Μωϋσῆς	1		Here Paul contrasts the **boldness** that he and those with him show with how **Moses** could not show God’s glory openly. In other words, Paul and those with him can reveal God’s glory openly, in contrast to Moses, who could not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrasts more explicit. Alternate translation: “and without hiding the glory, like Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	13	p1y3	figs-explicit	Μωϋσῆς ἐτίθει κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ, εἰς τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου	1		Here Paul refers to a story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md) that describes how Moses’ face shone with God’s glory after Moses spoke with him. Moses would hide his face with a **veil** when **his face** shone like this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is writing about more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrases in [3:7](../03/07.md), where Paul has already referred to this story. Alternate translation: “Moses wearing a veil to hide his face so that the sons of Israel would not look directly at it when the glory on his face, which came from talking with God, disappeared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	13	boui	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς υἱοὺς	1		Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	3	13	pdnk	translate-kinship	τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ	1		Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
2CO	3	13	vuyk	figs-explicit	τὸ τέλος	1		Here, the word **end** could refer to: (1) the result of the **fading**, which was that the “glory” completely stopped shining from Moses’ face. Alternate translation: “the cessation” or “the termination” (2) the purpose or implication of how the “glory” ceased shining from Moses’ face, which was that the old covenant too would cease. Alternate translation: “the result” or “the meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	13	p5u2	figs-explicit	τοῦ καταργουμένου	1	the end of that which was fading away	Here, the phrase **{what} was fading away** could refer to: (1) the “glory” that shone from the **face** of Moses. In this case, Paul could also be implying that the old covenant would also “fade.” Alternate translation: “of the glory that was fading from his face” (2) the old covenant, that would “fade away” when God instituted a new covenant. Alternate translation: “of the covenant that would fade away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	13	mczg	figs-possession	τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe how **{what} was fading away** completely ceased or “ended.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “how what was fading away ended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	13	fe5r	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **end**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “end” or “cease.” Alternate translation: “how what was fading away ended” or “what ceased after fading away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	14	kb8y	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here, the word **But** could introduce a contrast between: (1) being able to “look intently” and having **hardened** minds. Alternate translation: “But instead of looking intently,” (2) what Moses did (veiling his face) and what the Israelites did (have **hardened** minds). Alternate translation: “In contrast to Moses,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	3	14	csl1	writing-pronouns	τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν	1		Here, the word **their** refers to “the sons of Israel” that Paul mentioned in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun **their** refers. Alternate translation: “the minds of the sons of Israel” or “the minds of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	3	14	khkq	figs-activepassive	ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If it is possible, avoid stating who did the “hardening,” since Paul is emphasizing the fact that their minds were “hard,” not who did the “hardening.” If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Israelites did it to themselves. Alternate translation: “they hardened their minds” or “their minds became hard” (2) God did it to them. Alternate translation: “God hardened their minds” (3) Satan did it to them. Alternate translation: “Satan hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	3	14	zvf5	figs-metaphor	ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν	1	But their minds were hardened	Here Paul speaks as if people’s **minds** were a soft substance that could be **hardened**. He speaks in this way to indicate that their **minds** could not know or understand what was happening, unlike a soft substance that changes when something hits it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not realize what was true” or “they could not think properly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	14	tzbd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “and this is how:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	3	14	zm7j	figs-idiom	ἄχρι & τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας	1	For until this present day	Here, the phrase **until the present day** refers to all the time before and including the **present day**, which is the time when Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a period of time that includes the past and the present. Alternate translation: “up to the present” or “in the past and in the present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	3	14	w68p	figs-metaphor	τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον	1	when they read the old covenant, that same veil remains	Here Paul speaks as if a **veil** kept people from understanding the **old covenant** when it is “read,” and this veil is not **lifted**. He speaks in this way to identify the inability of people to understand the **old covenant** with how Moses’ kept the Israelites from looking at his face with a **veil**. Just as the **veil** kept them from seeing the glory on his face, so a **veil** keeps people from understanding **the reading of the old covenant**. Since Paul uses this figure of speech to connect what he is saying with what he has said about Moses, you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is a like a veil that remains at the reading of the old covenant, not being lifted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	14	wcbv	figs-infostructure	τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον	1		Here, the phrase **not being lifted** could: (1) explain how the veil **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, and it is not lifted” (2) go with **remains** and explain what **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains not having been lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	3	14	wymg	figs-explicit	τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα	1		Here, the phrase **same veil** could refer to: (1) the veil that Moses wore (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). Alternate translation: “the veil that Moses wore” (2) the veil that **hardened** their **minds**. Alternate translation: “the veil that hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	14	gg2d	figs-possession	ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης	1	when they read the old covenant	Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to a person **reading** the **old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “when the old covenant is read” or “when they read the old covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	14	orvo	figs-metonymy	τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης	1		Here, the phrase **old covenant** refers to the words that contain or describe **the old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to these words. Alternate translation: “of the message about the old covenant” or “of the words that describe the old covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	3	14	gl8l	figs-activepassive	μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον	1	It has not been removed, because only in Christ is it taken away	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who would do the action, Paul implies that “God” would do it. Alternate translation: “God not lifting it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	3	14	vygf	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		Here, the word **because** could indicate why: (1) the **veil** is not “lifted.” Alternate translation: “and it is not lifted because” (2) the **veil remains**. Alternate translation: “and the veil remains because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	3	14	m7lk	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains why and how the **veil** is “lifted.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ leads to the “lifting” of the **veil**. Alternate translation: “only when a person is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	14	r1lt	figs-explicit	καταργεῖται	1		Here, the phrase **fading away** is the same phrase that Paul used to describe how the “glory” was “fading” from Moses’ face (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). What Paul means is that the **veil** disappears or is removed **in Christ**. If possible, use a word or phrase that reminds your readers of how you translated “fading” in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “is it being abolished” or “is it disappearing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	14	rhid	writing-pronouns	καταργεῖται	1		Here, the word **it** could refer to: (1) the **veil**. Alternate translation: “is this veil fading away” (2) the **old covenant**. Alternate translation: “is this covenant fading away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	3	15	cv2j	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1		Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about the veil “fading away” in Christ ([3:14](../03/14.md)). What Paul says in the rest of the verse repeats many of the ideas from the first parts of [3:14](../03/14.md). Consider whether a contrast word or a connecting word expresses the idea most clearly. Alternate translation: “However,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	3	15	rjh5	figs-idiom	ἕως σήμερον	1	But even today	Here the phrase **until today** refers to all the time before and including the present day, which is the time when Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a period of time that includes the past and the present. See how you translated the similar phrase “until the present day” in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “up to the present” or “in the past and in the present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	3	15	t3dl	figs-metonymy	ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς	1	whenever Moses is read	Here, the word **Moses** could refer to: (1) the first five books of the Old Testament, often called “the Law” or the “Pentateuch.” Alternate translation: “the Law is read” or “the first parts of the Old Testament are read” (2) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures are read” or “the Old Testament is read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	3	15	ip29	figs-activepassive	ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone reads Moses” or “they hear someone read Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	3	15	bb5u	figs-metaphor	κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν κεῖται	1		Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is like a veil that lies over their heart” or “they do not understand, as if a veil lies over their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	15	gwp9	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν	1	a veil lies over their heart	In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “over their mind” or “over their understanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	3	15	z5zh	grammar-collectivenouns	τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν	1		Here the author is speaking of “hearts” in general, not of one particular **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “hearts” in general. Alternate translation: “their hearts” or “each of their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
2CO	3	15	lmu6	writing-pronouns	τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν	1		Here, the word **their** could refer to: (1) anyone who hears the reading of **Moses** without being “in Christ.” Alternate translation: “the hearts of those who listen” (2) the same people that “their” referred to in [3:14](../03/14.md): the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites’ heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	3	16	k2dr	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς Κύριον	1	whenever a person turns to the Lord	Here, the phrase **turn to the Lord** refers to a how people stop doing whatever they want and instead begin to trust and obey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “one begins to serve the Lord” or “one begins to believe in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	16	aqna	writing-pronouns	ἐπιστρέψῃ	1		Here, the word **one** refers to any person who does the “turning.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person. Alternate translation: “anyone might turn” or “any person might turn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	3	16	wawh	figs-explicit	Κύριον	1		Here, the word **Lord** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “God the Lord” (2) Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Lord Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	16	mibm	figs-metaphor	περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα	1		Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:14–15](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “the lack of understanding that is like a veil is taken away” or “one understands, as if the veil was taken away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	16	w1y2	figs-activepassive	περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα	1	the veil is taken away	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “the veil disappears” or “God takes away the veil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	3	17	lrxy	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	3	17	ulmp	figs-explicit	ὁ & Κύριος & Κυρίου	1		Here, just as in [3:16](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same you did in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “God the Lord … of God the Lord is” or “the Lord Jesus … of the Lord Jesus is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	17	erpi	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμά & τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1		Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit … that Spirit of the Lord is” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “the spirit … the spirit of the Lord is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	17	f2o7		ὁ & Κύριος τὸ Πνεῦμά ἐστιν	1		Here Paul could mean that: (1) the “Lord” mentioned in [3:16](../03/16.md) is the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of whom I speak is the Holy Spirit” (2) believers encounter God the **Lord** as the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord is experienced as the Holy Spirit” (3) the **Lord** is “spiritual.” Alternate translation: “the Lord is a spirit”
2CO	3	17	sp81	figs-metaphor	οὗ & τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου, ἐλευθερία	1		Here Paul speaks of the **Spirit** being in a place, and so **freedom** also is in that place. Here speaks in this way to connect the **Spirit** and **freedom**. He means that whoever has the **Spirit** also has **freedom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever has the Spirit of the Lord also has freedom” or “the Spirit of the Lord gives freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	17	b016	figs-possession	τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Spirit** as belonging to or part of the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit who is the Lord is” or “the Spirit who belongs to the Lord is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	3	17	uoss	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλευθερία	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “people are free” or “you are free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	17	ao12	figs-explicit	ἐλευθερία	1		Here Paul does not give any details about what people experience **freedom** from or for. If possible, you also should not make these ideas explicit. However, if you must express more information about the **freedom**, it could be **freedom** (1) from the veil. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the veil” (2) from the condemnation of the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from condemnation” (3) from the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the old covenant” (4) to preach the gospel. Alternate translation: “there is freedom to proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	18	r6rx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now we all	Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous section. In this case, Paul is concluding his discussion about Moses and the veil in [3:12–17](../03/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a final development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In the end,” or “Finally,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	3	18	l3xw	figs-metaphor	ἀνακεκαλυμμένῳ προσώπῳ, τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου κατοπτριζόμενοι	1	with unveiled faces, see as a reflection the glory of the Lord	Here the author speaks as if believers do not have a “veil” over their “faces” and can thus “reflect” God’s **glory**. Since the veiling language is an important part of what Paul is saying, you should preserve the figure of speech or express the idea by using a simile. Paul is indicating a contrast that could be: (1) with Moses, who had to veil the glory on his face. Unlike him, believers do not need to veil their faces. Alternate translation: “revealing the glory of the Lord like those who have unveiled faces” (2) the Israelites, who could not look directly at the glory of God. Unlike them, believers can see God’s glory directly without a “veil.” Alternate translation: “seeing the glory of the Lord, unlike those who could only see a veil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	3	18	ui8y	translate-unknown	κατοπτριζόμενοι	1		Here, the word translated **reflecting** could refer to: (1) acting as a mirror that “reflects” an image. Alternate translation: “mirroring” (2) seeing something that is “reflected” in a mirror. Alternate translation: “seeing in a mirror” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	3	18	mdu9	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “how great the Lord is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	18	brpu	figs-explicit	Κυρίου	1		Here, just as in [3:16–17](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same way you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “of God the Lord” or “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	18	rc9x	figs-activepassive	μεταμορφούμεθα	1	are being transformed into the same image	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “are those whom God is transforming into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	3	18	cq3i	figs-explicit	τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα	1		Here, the phrase **the same image** refers to the **image** that belongs to the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “into his image” or “the that image” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	3	18	g0ku	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα & ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **image** and **glory**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” and an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “people who reflect the Lord from what is glorious to what is glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	3	18	bx5b	figs-idiom	ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν	1	from glory to glory	Here Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word, much like he did in [2:16](../02/16.md). He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the transformation, and **to** indicates the effects of the transformation. Alternate translation: “by someone who has glory so that we also have glory” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the transformation is characterized completely by **glory**. Alternate translation: “with great glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	3	18	mw3v		καθάπερ ἀπὸ	1	just as from the Lord	Here, the phrase **just as from** indicates the source of the transformation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “and this is from” or “even as it is accomplished by”
2CO	3	18	wlp1		Κυρίου, Πνεύματος	1		Here, Paul could be using this phrase to: (1) identify the **Lord** as the **Spirit**, just as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Just as in that verse, he could mean that the **Lord** is the **Spirit**, or he could mean that the **Lord** is experienced as the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord, that is, the Spirit” or “the Lord, whom we experience as the Spirit” (2) name the Holy Spirit as “the Spirit of the Lord,” as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Alternate translation: “the Spirit of the Lord” (3) refer to the **Lord** to whom the **Spirit** belongs or who sends the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of the Spirit”
2CO	3	18	mmdd	figs-explicit	Πνεύματος	1		Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “who is spiritual” or “who is a spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	intro	rx1c			0		# 2 Corinthians 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)<br>      * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)<br>      * Suffering and ministry (4:7–18)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Life and death<br><br>In [4:7–14](../04/07.md), Paul refers to life, death, and resurrection. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “death” or “dying,” he is referring to how they suffer and experience things related to death. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “life” or being “raised,” he is most likely referring to how God will resurrect them. He could also be referring to how God delivers them from “death” when they suffer or are persecuted. Consider what forms you could use to refer to experiences related to death and resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>In [4:3–6](../04/03.md), Paul describes a lack of understanding and belief in the gospel as “veiling,” “blinding,” and “darkness.” He describes understanding and belief in the gospel as “shining” and “light.” These figures of speech compare believing and understanding to seeing. If possible, preserve these figures of speech, but you could express the ideas in plain language if necessary. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])<br><br>### “Outer” and “inner” man<br><br>In [4:16](../04/16.md), Paul refers to two different parts of himself and those with him: their “inner man” and their “outer man.” The “inner” and the “outer” are probably not directly related to the spiritual and physical parts of people. Rather, the “inner” is connected to what is “not seen,” and the “outer” is connected to what is “seen” (see [4:18](../04/18.md)). Consider what form you can use to refer to the parts of a person that people can observe and the parts of a person that they cannot observe. Make sure that your translation does not simply distinguish between the skin and what is under the skin. It is more important to use words that suggest that what people observe is not always what is really true about a person. <br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Exclusive “we”<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses these words, he does not include the Corinthians unless a note specifies otherwise. He could be referring to: (1) himself and those who preach the gospel with him. (2) just himself. It is recommended that you follow the first option, but both are possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])<br><br>### The contrasts in [4:8–12](../04/08.md).<br><br>In these verses, Paul contrasts bad things that happen to him and those with him with good things that happen to them. Paul wrote these verses as one long sentence with short clauses because this was a powerful form in his culture. Consider using a form that is powerful in your culture. The UST expresses the idea with many short sentences because this is one kind of powerful form in English.
2CO	4	1	lyi4	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ τοῦτο	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion based on what Paul has said, particularly what he said in [3:4–18](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	4	1	ln4n	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔχοντες	1		Here, the word having introduces a reason why Paul and those with him **do not become discouraged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	4	1	uoxl	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχοντες τὴν διακονίαν ταύτην	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **ministry**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “minister.” Alternate translation: “being able to minister in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	1	h1ud	figs-explicit	καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν	1	and just as we have received mercy	Here, this phrase could indicate: (1) the way that Paul and those with him received the **ministry**. Alternate translation: “which we received by God’s mercy” (2) what led to Paul and those with him receiving the ministry, which was their conversions. Alternate translation: “which we received after God had mercy on us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	1	que0	figs-abstractnouns	ἠλεήθημεν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **mercy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “merciful” or an adverb such as “mercifully.” Alternate translation: “God acted mercifully toward us” or “God was merciful to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	1	ix7n	translate-unknown	οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν	1	having this ministry	Here, the word **discouraged** could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	4	2	yp4g	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	we have rejected the shameful hidden things	Here, the word **Instead** introduces a contrast with “becoming discouraged” in the previous verse ([4:1](../04/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead of that” or “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	4	2	z4c2	figs-explicit	τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης	1	the shameful hidden things	Here, the phrase **shameful hidden things** could refer to: (1) things that people “hide” because they are **shameful**. Alternate translation: “the shameful things that people hide” (2) things that are both **hidden** and **shameful**. Alternate translation: “anything that is shameful and hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	2	ey75	figs-metaphor	μὴ περιπατοῦντες	1	walking in craftiness	Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were **walking in** something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or with plain language. Alternate translation: “not acting” or “not behaving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	2	vvzc	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πανουργίᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **craftiness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “crafty” or an adverb such as “craftily.” Alternate translation: “craftily” or “in a crafty way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	2	lzn0	translate-unknown	δολοῦντες	1		Here, the word **distorting** refers to changing something so that it is different than how it started. In this case, Paul is referring to changing **the word of God** so that it is not purely what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to changing something or making it less pure. Alternate translation: “perverting” or “altering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	4	2	gcqm	figs-possession	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **word** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the word that comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	2	gp3g	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	not distorting the word of God	Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	4	2	mrri	figs-possession	τῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **manifestation** that reveals **the truth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “by revealing the truth” or “by making the truth known** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	2	e7y7	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **manifestation** and **truth**, you could express the ideas by using a verb such as “reveal” and an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “by revealing what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	2	rqin	translate-unknown	συνιστάνοντες ἑαυτοὺς	1		Here, phrase **commend ourselves** refers to the practice of stating why one should be trusted and welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to giving reasons why people should welcome and trust a person. See you how you translated the similar phrase in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “speaking favorably of ourselves” or “vouching for ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	4	2	aj24	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	commending ourselves to every person’s conscience	Although the word **man’s** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person’s” or “to man’s and woman’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	4	2	f6n1	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	before God	Here, Paul refers to being **before God** to indicate a close connection to God. The phrase could indicate that: (1) God testifies or bears witness to Paul and those with him. Alternate translation: “with God testifying about us” (2) people can recognize that Paul preaches the gospel only when they are **before God** or in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “that is in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	3	lu2h	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word **But** introduces a development from what Paul said in the previous verse ([4:2](../04/02.md)). In this verse, he explains that, although they reveal “the truth,” it may be **veiled** to some people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of development. Alternate translation: “Now” or “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	4	3	m82q	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ & καὶ	1		Here Paul could be using **even if** to introduce: (1) something that he thinks really is true. Alternate translation: “even though” (2) something that he thinks might be true. Alternate translation: “supposing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	4	3	mti5	figs-metaphor	ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον	1	But if our gospel is veiled, it is veiled only to those who are perishing	Here Paul again uses the language of “veiling,” just as he did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). A **gospel** that **is veiled** is one that people do not understand or believe in. If possible, express the idea the same way you did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). Alternate translation: “it is as if a veil hides our gospel, this happens to the ones perishing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	3	hz2f	figs-activepassive	εἰ & ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν & ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον	1	if our gospel is veiled, it is veiled	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the “veiling” and instead refer to how a “veil” hides the **gospel**. Alternate translation: “if a veil covers our gospel, this happens for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	4	3	e5yu	figs-extrainfo	τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις	1	our gospel	Christians disagree over whether God causes people to “perish” or whether people cause themselves to “perish.” The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the perishing. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the “perishing.” See how you translated the similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2CO	4	4	m71d	figs-explicit	ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here, the phrase **the god of this age** refers to Satan, or the devil. Paul describes him in this way because God has allowed Satan to have some control or power in **this age**, which refers to the world as it is right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the god of this age, Satan,” or “the devil, who rules over this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	4	ptb6	figs-possession	ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **god** who rules over or controls **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the god who controls this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	4	r6pz	figs-metaphor	ἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the god of this age has blinded the minds of the unbelieving	Here Paul speaks as if **minds** were eyes that could be **blinded** or that could see **light**. If **minds** are **blinded**, they cannot understand something. If **minds** can see **light**, they can understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has made the minds of the unbelievers to be like blind eyes, so that they do not understand the gospel of the glory of Christ … just like blind eyes cannot see light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	4	squ9	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ	1		Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, with the result that” (2) the purpose of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “ of the unbelievers in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	4	4	j1vz	figs-possession	τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the light of the gospel	Here the author uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **light** either is or comes from the **gospel**, and the **gospel** is about the **glory of Christ**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **Christ** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the light, which is the gospel about the glorious Christ” or “the light that comes from the gospel concerning how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	4	hj21	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of the great Christ” or “Christ, the glorious one,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	4	fmaq	figs-abstractnouns	ὅς ἐστιν εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **image**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” or “represent.” Alternate translation: “who reflects God” or “who represents God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	4	tx9h	figs-possession	εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the god of this world	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe how **Christ** functions as the **image** that shows what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the image that shows what God is like” or “the image that reflects God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	5	nvg2	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said about “the gospel of the glory of Christ” in [4:4](../04/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	4	5	ddw1	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον, ἑαυτοὺς δὲ δούλους ὑμῶν	1	but Christ Jesus as Lord, and ourselves as your servants	These two clauses leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but we proclaim the Lord Christ Jesus, and we proclaim ourselves as your servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	4	5	xvs8		Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον	1		Here, the phrase **Lord Christ Jesus** could: (1) give a title or name for Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who is Christ Jesus” (2) state that **Christ Jesus** is the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus as Lord”
2CO	4	5	t8du	figs-explicit	διὰ Ἰησοῦν	1	for Jesus’ sake	Here Paul could be indicating that he and those with him are **servants** because of: (1) who Jesus is. Alternate translation: “because of who Jesus is” (2) what Jesus has done. Alternate translation: “because of what Jesus has done” (3) what Jesus wants Paul and those with him to do. Alternate translation: “because that is what Jesus wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	6	nbpt	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why Paul and those with him “do not proclaim” themselves but rather Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	4	6	fy6h	writing-quotations	ὁ Θεὸς ὁ εἰπών	1		Here Paul introduces something that God **said**. The quotation is not directly from the Old Testament. Rather Paul is probably paraphrasing [Genesis 1:3](../gen/01/03.md), and he may also be referring to [Isaiah 9:2](../isa/09/02.md). Introduce the quotation as something that God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote that refers to the passages that Paul may be paraphrasing. Alternate translation: “God is the one who spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2CO	4	6	rw5z	figs-quotations	εἰπών, ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψει	1	Light will shine out of darkness	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “who said that from darkness a light will shine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2CO	4	6	mukf	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ σκότους	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **darkness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “In a dark place” or “From what is dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	6	d5x7	figs-metaphor	ἔλαμψεν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως	1	He has shone … to give the light of the knowledge of the glory of God	Here Paul continues the light metaphor from [4:4](../04/04.md). When God **shined** in their **hearts**, that means that he caused them to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused us to understand, just as if he illuminated our hearts, the knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	6	bj1j	figs-metonymy	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1	in our hearts	In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that God has **shined** on their thoughts or on what they think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our minds” or “in our thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	4	6	m6rf	figs-exclusive	ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν	1		Here, the word **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	4	6	fkq3	figs-possession	φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **illumination** either is or comes from the **knowledge**, and the **knowledge** is about the **glory of God**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “the illumination, which is the knowledge about the glorious God” or “the illumination that comes from the knowledge concerning how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	6	mpg9	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the light of the knowledge of the glory of God	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **illumination**, **knowledge**, and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “illumine” and “know” and an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to illumine us so that we can know the great God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	6	p736	figs-explicit	ἐν προσώπῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ	Here, the **glory** that is **in {face} of Jesus Christ** contrasts with the glory that faded on Moses’ face (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). What Paul means is that Jesus reveals or shows what God is like, particularly how glorious he is. If possible, use words that remind your readers of what Paul said about Moses in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ reveals as if it shone on his face” or “that Jesus Christ shows to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	7	xe5i	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But we have	Here, the word **But** contrasts the “glory of God” from the previous verse with how Paul and those with him are **clay jars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	4	7	xx2c	figs-metaphor	ἔχομεν & τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον ἐν ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν	1	we have this treasure in jars of clay	Here Paul speaks of the knowledge about God’s glory as if it were a **treasure**, that is, something that is very valuable. He speaks of himself and those who proclaim the gospel as if they were **clay jars**, which are not valuable and can break easily. He speaks in this way to contrast how valuable and long-lasting the gospel is (**the treasure**) with how worthless and weak he and those who preach the gospel with him are in comparison (**clay jars**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “we have these riches in disposable containers” or “we have this valuable gospel as weak and worthless people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	7	yzd7	writing-pronouns	τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον	1		Here, the word **this** identifies the **treasure** as “the knowledge of the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ” (see [4:6](../04/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **this** refers to. Alternate translation: “the treasure of the knowledge of the glory of God” or “that treasure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	4	7	nz0r	translate-unknown	ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν	1		Here, the word **jars** refers to any type of container that is meant to hold something else. The word **clay** refers to dirt or mud, which was used to make inexpensive and fragile containers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to containers made out of cheap and weak material. Alternate translation: “inexpensive containers” or “fragile and cheap vessels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	4	7	i1rs	figs-possession	ἡ ὑπερβολὴ τῆς δυνάμεως	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to characterize the **power** as something with **surpassing greatness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the surpassing greatness that characterizes the power” or “the surpassingly great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	7	u16o	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ὑπερβολὴ τῆς δυνάμεως	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **greatness** and **power**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives such as “great” and “powerful.” Alternate translation: “how surpassingly great and powerful these things are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	8	ga9z	figs-activepassive	ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι; ἀπορούμενοι	1	We are afflicted in every way	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use vague or indefinite subjects. Alternate translation: “in every side someone pressing us in, but not crushing us; feeling perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	4	8	wqg9	figs-infostructure	ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι	1		Here, the phrase **in every {side}** could go with: (1) all the statements in this verse and the following verse. Alternate translation: “in every situation experiencing these things: being pressed in” (2) just the first statement about **being pressed in, but not being crushed**. Alternate translation: “being pressed in on every side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	4	8	vhjn	figs-explicit	ἐν παντὶ	1		Here, the word **every** indicates that what Paul is about to describe happens often or in many situations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in every situation” or “at many times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	8	fi9c	figs-metaphor	θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι	1		Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him were physically being **pressed in** by other people but not **being crushed** by them. He speaks in this way to indicate that other people are making his life difficult or trying to hurt him, but they are not fully succeeding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “being pushed, but not being knocked over” or “being mistreated, but not being harmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	8	i7id	translate-unknown	ἀπορούμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐξαπορούμενοι	1		Here, the word **perplexed** refers to how someone is not sure what to do. The word **despairing** refers to giving up or refusing to do anything. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that express these ideas clearly. Alternate translation: “being unsure, but not losing hope” or “being confused, but not despondent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	4	9	bz8m	figs-activepassive	διωκόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐνκαταλειπόμενοι; καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι	1	We are persecuted but not forsaken	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use vague or indefinite subjects for **persecuted** and **thrown down**, you indicate that God is the one who does not “forsake.” Alternate translation: “someone persecuting us, but God not forsaking us; someone throwing us down, but we not perishing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	4	9	uvq1	figs-metaphor	καταβαλλόμενοι	1	We are struck down but not destroyed	Here, Paul speaks as if people physically push him and those with him so that they fall down. By speaking in this way, he is referring to any time people act against or bully him and those with him, which may or may not be physical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “being bullied” or “being attacked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	9	mz1m	translate-unknown	οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι	1		Here, the word **perishing** refers to being defeated or destroyed. Paul means that those who “throw” him and those with him down do not succeed in defeating or destroying them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural construction. Alternate translation: “not being destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	4	10	zt4b	figs-metaphor	τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι περιφέροντες	1	We always carry in our body the death of Jesus	Here Paul speaks as if **the dying of Jesus** were an object that he and those with him could “carry around.” He could speak in this way to indicate that: (1) he experiences suffering and pain that are like the **dying of Jesus**. Alternate translation: “experiencing in the body dying that is like the dying of Jesus” (2) he and those with him proclaim the **dying of Jesus** both by what they say and what they do (**in the body**). Alternate translation: “proclaiming in the body the dying of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	10	ethc	grammar-collectivenouns	τῷ σώματι & τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν	1		Here the author is speaking of their “bodies” in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to their “bodies” in general. Alternate translation: “the bodies … our bodies” or “each of our bodies … each of our bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
2CO	4	10	rnup	figs-possession	τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **dying** that **Jesus** experienced. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the death that Jesus experienced” or “how Jesus died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	10	l6f6	figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ	1	the life of Jesus also may be shown in our bodies	Here, the “revelation” of **the life of Jesus** in **our body** could mean that: (1) the **life** that Jesus has will become the life that they too have. In other words, like Jesus resurrected, they too will resurrect. Alternate translation: “we too might experience in our body the new life that Jesus has” (2) they “reveal” the fact that Jesus is alive. In other words, by **carrying around** Jesus’ death, they also reveal his resurrection. Alternate translation: “we might reveal in our body the resurrection of Jesus” (3) they are delivered from the sufferings that they experience so that they have **life** from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “we might experience life from Jesus when we are delivered from suffering in our body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	10	w3jc	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ	1	the life of Jesus also may be shown in our bodies	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal in our body the life of Jesus also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	4	10	k10l	figs-possession	ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **life** that could: (1) belong to **Jesus**. In other words, it is his resurrection life. Alternate translation: “the life that Jesus has” (2) come from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “life from Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	10	j23j	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	11	vivg	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **for** introduces a clarification of what Paul said in [4:10](../04/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a clarification. Alternate translation: “in fact,” or “in other words,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	4	11	l1xk	figs-activepassive	ἀεὶ & ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες & παραδιδόμεθα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God is always handing us, being alive, over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	4	11	ggb5	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἀεὶ & ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες & παραδιδόμεθα	1		Here, the phrase **being alive** identifies the situation in which the rest of Paul’s statement is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that makes this relationship clearer. Alternate translation: “we, during the time in which we are alive, are always being handed over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2CO	4	11	ht74	figs-metaphor	ἀεὶ & εἰς θάνατον παραδιδόμεθα	1	For we who are alive are always being handed over to death for the sake of Jesus	Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him were objects that someone could “hand over” to **death**. He means that they are under the power of **death** or are experiencing things related to death, like suffering and hardship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “are always experiencing what relates to death” or “are always under death’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	11	admc	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς θάνατον	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “so that we might die” or “to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	11	wt5i	figs-explicit	διὰ Ἰησοῦν	1		Here, the phrase **for the sake of Jesus** could indicate that Paul and those with him **are always being handed over to death**: (1) to serve **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “in order to serve Jesus” (2) because of **Jesus**, particularly because they preach about him. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus” or “because we proclaim Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	11	d1wm		ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν	1	so that the life of Jesus may be shown in our mortal flesh	Here Paul uses words and ideas that are very similar to what he used in the second part of [4:10](../04/10.md). You should express the idea much like you did in that verse.
2CO	4	11	ww5r	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ	1	so that the life of Jesus may be shown in our mortal flesh	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal also the life of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	4	11	r513	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” or “the fact that Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	11	kucp	translate-unknown	τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν	1		Here, the phrase **mortal flesh** primarily refers to how people will die. Paul may be referring specifically to the physical part of people, but he may simply be referring to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes people as those who will die. Alternate translation: “in us who will die” or “our mortal bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	4	12	dc7q	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		Here, the phrase **So then** introduces a conclusion that is based on [4:7–11](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the conclusion to a section. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “In the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	4	12	q3il	figs-personification	ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	death is at work in us, but life is at work in you	Here Paul speaks of **death** and **life** as if they were persons who could “work.” He means that he and those with experience things related to **death**, while the Corinthians experience things related to **life**. Alternate translation: “we experience death, but you experience life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2CO	4	12	r5se	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **death** and **life**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live.” Alternate translation: “we are dying, but you are living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	12	n7or	figs-explicit	δὲ	1		Here Paul may be: (1) simply contrasting **death and **life**. Alternate translation: “but on the other hand,” (2) indicating that the **death** in them leads to the **life in you**. Alternate translation: “but so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	12	tvne	figs-ellipsis	ἡ & ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν	1		This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “life works in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	4	12	albz	figs-explicit	ἡ & ζωὴ	1		Here, the word **life** could refer: (1) specifically to resurrection life, which the Corinthians will receive. Alternate translation: “eternal life” (2) generally to being alive and not experiencing suffering or dangerous things. Alternate translation: “the experience of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	13	jqmm	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word **But** could introduce: (1) a development or new idea. Alternate translation: “Further,” (2) a contrast with the “death” that works in them. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	4	13	cckc	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔχοντες	1		Here, the word **having** introduces a reason or cause for why **we also believe** and **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	4	13	ret6	figs-possession	τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως	1	the same spirit of faith	Here Paul uses the possessive to refer a **spirit** that could: (1) be characterized by **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same believing spirit” (2) give or cause **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same spirit that gives faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	13	wrr3		τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα	1		Here, the word **spirit** could refer to: (1) a human spirit or attitude, which is characterized by faith. Alternate translation: “the same attitude” (2) the Holy Spirit, who gives **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same Holy Spirit”
2CO	4	13	ery0	figs-explicit	τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως	1		Here, the word **same** could indicate that: (1) this is the **same spirit** that the person who wrote the quotation had. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that the psalmist had,” (2) this is the **same spirit** that the Corinthians also have. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that you have,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	13	qma7	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς πίστεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “that believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	13	gzf4	figs-activepassive	τὸ γεγραμμένον	1	according to that which was written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **written** rather than the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “what the psalmist wrote” or “to what the psalm says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	4	13	il5h	writing-quotations	κατὰ τὸ γεγραμμένον	1	I believed, and so I spoke	In Paul’s culture, **according to {what} has been written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see [Psalm 116:10](../psa/116/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from Psalms. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “as it says in the book of Psalms,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2CO	4	13	vshy	figs-quotations	τὸ γεγραμμένον, ἐπίστευσα, διὸ ἐλάλησα;	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “how it was written that he believed; therefore he spoke,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2CO	4	14	sfxb	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδότες	1		Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason for what Paul said that he and those with him do (see [4:13](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	4	14	ruov	writing-pronouns	ὁ ἐγείρας	1		Here, the word **one** refers to God the Father, who **raised Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “God who raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	4	14	t2i8	figs-idiom	ὁ ἐγείρας τὸν Ἰησοῦν, καὶ ἡμᾶς & ἐγερεῖ	1	that the one who raised the Lord Jesus will … raise	Paul uses the words **raised** and **raise** to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one having restored Jesus to life will also restore us to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	4	14	zd0j	figs-explicit	σὺν Ἰησοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **with Jesus** could indicate that the Paul and those with him will: (1) be where **Jesus** is. Alternate translation: “to be where Jesus is” (2) be resurrected as **Jesus** was. Alternate translation: “as he raised Jesus” (3) be joined with **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “together with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	14	zmzy	translate-unknown	παραστήσει σὺν ὑμῖν	1		Here, the phrase **will present** refers to causing someone to stand in front of or beside someone else. Here, the idea is most likely that God causes Paul and those with him to stand before God and beside **you**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “will set us before him next to you” or “will bring us together before him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	4	15	w37z	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul has said in [4:7–14](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	4	15	v7sj	figs-explicit	τὰ & πάντα δι’ ὑμᾶς	1	For all these things are for your sake	Here, the phrase **all these things** refers to everything that Paul and those with him do and experience as they preach the gospel, including their sufferings (see [4:7–12](../04/07.md)) and the message that they preach (see [4:13–14](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I have described is for your sake” or “everything I have referred to is for your sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	15	wl88	figs-explicit	ἡ χάρις	1		Here Paul implies that the **grace** comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “grace from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	15	lg1l	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ χάρις	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gracious.” Alternate translation: “how God is gracious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	15	xdxk	figs-explicit	διὰ τῶν πλειόνων	1		Here, the phrase **through more and more** could indicate that: (1) the **grace** increases by being received by **more** people. Alternate translation: “among more and more people” (2) the **grace** increases because God uses **more** situations and experiences to spread the gospel. Alternate translation: “by means of more and more service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	15	u8pp	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εὐχαριστίαν περισσεύσῃ εἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	thanksgiving may increase	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **thanksgiving** and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “thank” and “glorify.” Alternate translation: “may cause people to abound in thanking God to glorify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	15	zt5h	figs-possession	εἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **glory** that **God** receives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to glory for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	16	u6e5	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has said, probably focusing on what he said in [4:7–15](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion from a previous section. Alternate translation: “So then,” or “Because of all that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	4	16	p7pv	translate-unknown	οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν	1		See you how translated the word **discouraged** in [4:1](../04/01.md). It refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	4	16	cb92	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ	1	So we do not become discouraged	Here Paul is speaking as if **our outer man is decaying** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that **our outer man** is indeed **decaying**. Alternate translation: “despite the fact that” or “although” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	4	16	hhv6	figs-explicit	ὁ ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος	1	outwardly we are wasting away	Here, the phrase **outer man** could refer to: (1) the part of the person that others can observe and see. Alternate translation: “our observable part” or “our external part” (2) the physical part of the person. Alternate translation: “our body” or “our physical part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	16	pnms	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος & ἔσω	1		Although the word **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person … inner person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	4	16	jcra	grammar-collectivenouns	ἄνθρωπος διαφθείρεται & ἔσω & ἀνακαινοῦται	1		Here the author is speaking of **outer** and **inner** “men” in general, not of one particular **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “men” or “people” in general. Alternate translation: “men are decaying … inner men are being renewed” or “persons are decaying … outer persons are being renewed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
2CO	4	16	vliu	figs-metaphor	διαφθείρεται	1		Here Paul speaks as if the **outer man** were a dead thing that was **decaying**. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **outer man** is in the process of dying or passing away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “is dying” or “is passing away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	16	s9b2	figs-explicit	ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν	1	inwardly we are being renewed day by day	Here, the phrase **inner {man}** could refer to: (1) the part of the person that others cannot observe and see. Alternate translation: “our hidden part” or “our inward part” (2) the spiritual part of the person. Alternate translation: “our heart” or “our spiritual part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	16	zct5	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν ἀνακαινοῦται	1	inwardly we are being renewed day by day	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God is renewing our inner man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	4	16	l0jk	figs-idiom	ἡμέρᾳ καὶ ἡμέρᾳ	1		Here, the phrase **day {by} day** refers to something that happens one day, and then the next day, and so on. One way of expressing this idea is with the phrase “every day.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to sequential days. Alternate translation: “each day” or “every single day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	4	17	no4a	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “do not become discouraged” (see [4:16](../04/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We do not become discouraged because” or “We do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	4	17	e4s0	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ & παραυτίκα ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως ἡμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **affliction**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “afflict” or “suffer.” Alternate translation: “how we are afflicted in light and momentary ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	17	x1du	translate-unknown	παραυτίκα	1		Here, the word **momentary** identifies something as temporary or only lasting for a short time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “short-lived” or “fleeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	4	17	pd63	figs-metaphor	ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως & αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης	1	this momentary, light affliction is preparing us for an eternal weight of glory	Here Paul describes **affliction** and **glory** as if they were objects that could be **light** or have **weight**. He speaks in this way to indicate how unimportant or insignificant the **affliction** is compared with how important or significant the **glory** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “small affliction … an eternal, great glory” or “insignificant affliction … an eternal, significant glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	17	jzhi	figs-metaphor	κατεργάζεται ἡμῖν	1		Here Paul speaks as if the **affliction** were a process that was **producing** the **glory**. He means that the **affliction** leads to **glory** for **us**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “is leading us to” or “is enabling us to gain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	4	17	qv6f	figs-possession	αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **an eternal weight** that is made up of **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “an eternal weight that is glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	4	17	xg92	figs-abstractnouns	δόξης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of what is great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	4	17	na9y	figs-idiom	καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν εἰς ὑπερβολὴν	1	that exceeds all measurement	Here, the phrase **far beyond all comparison** identifies something that is much greater than anything else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies something that is greatest or most amazing. Alternate translation: “that is greater than anything” or “that is the greatest of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	4	18	thyv	grammar-connect-logic-result	μὴ σκοπούντων ἡμῶν	1		Here, the phrase **We are not watching** could introduce: (1) a result or inference from what Paul said about “affliction” and “glory” in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “Therefore, we are not watching” (2) what Paul does while he experiences the “affliction” he mentions in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “That is true while we are not watching” (3) the reason why the “affliction” leads to “glory” in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “That is true because we are not watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	4	18	fp4f	figs-explicit	μὴ σκοπούντων	1		Here, the word **watching** refers specifically to focusing on something or paying close attention to something. It does not require the attention or focus to be visual. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to non-visual focus or attention. Alternate translation: “are not focusing on” or “are not concentrating on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	4	18	t2fp	figs-activepassive	τὰ βλεπόμενα, ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα	1	things that are seen … things that are unseen	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “the things that people see, but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	4	18	f97x	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα	1	but for things that are unseen	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we are watching the things not being seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	4	18	hbrg	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why **We** are **watching** the things that are not seen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “We do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	4	18	kx7m	figs-activepassive	τὰ γὰρ βλεπόμενα & τὰ δὲ μὴ βλεπόμενα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “For the things that people see … but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	intro	s14p			0		# 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)<br>      * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)<br>      * The gospel (5:11–6:2)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Resurrection bodies<br><br>In [5:1–5](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about new bodies that believers will receive when Jesus comes back. Right now, he and those with him “groan” while they have their current bodies. That is because these bodies are weak and will eventually die. However, Paul and those with him do not want to just get rid of their bodies. Rather, they are looking forward expectantly to receiving new bodies that will not die. Paul expresses these ideas by using building and clothing language. See the sections below that address how this language functions. Make sure that your translation clearly contrasts old bodies with new bodies and does not suggest that Paul just wants to get rid of his body. <br><br>### The intermediate state?<br><br>In [5:6–9](../05/06.md), Paul speaks about being “away from the body” and “with the Lord.” As the previous section has illustrated, Paul’s goal is to have a new body, not to be “away from the body.” So, what is he referring to here? There are three primary options. First, many Christians believe that Paul is talking about the time period between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back. During this time period, the believer does not have a body but is with Jesus in heaven. Then, when Jesus comes back, the believer receives a new body. Second, some Christians believe that Paul is talking about how believers receive new bodies immediately after they die. In other words, the next thing that a believer experiences after he or she dies is Jesus’ return. In this case, there is no time period between death and resurrection. Third, some Christians believe that Paul is speaking about how believers receive a temporary body for the time they are in heaven with Jesus before he comes back. If possible, your translation should allow for all three of these interpretations. Make sure that you include at least option one, since this is the option that most Christians believe. <br><br>### New creation<br><br>In [5:17](../05/17.md), Paul speaks about how being “in Christ” leads to “new creation,” with “old things” passing away and “new things” coming. Paul uses very general language, and the “new creation” could identify the person who is “in Christ” or everything that God is making “new.” If it is about people primarily, Paul’s point is that they are made “new” when they are in Christ. If it is about the world in general, Paul’s point is that God makes the world “new” in Christ, and people experience this “new creation” when they too are in Christ. Since Paul’s language is so general, it is best to express the idea in such a way that both of these interpretations are possible. If you must choose one, most interpreters think that Paul is focusing on people here. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/creation]])<br><br>### Reconciliation<br><br>In [5:18–20](../05/18.md), Paul speaks about how God “reconciles” people to himself and gives the “ministry of reconciliation” to Paul and those with him. The word “reconcile” refers to how someone restores a relationship with someone else so that they can be together again. In other words, when someone does something that breaks or hurts a relationship, “reconciliation” heals the broken relationship. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Bodies as homes<br><br>In [5:1–9](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about bodies as if they were homes. He identifies current earthly bodies as “tents,” which indicates that they do not last. He identifies resurrection bodies as “buildings” that God makes. Paul uses the language of “home” to indicate that people belong in bodies and not without bodies. However, he does seem to think that people can be without bodies for a period of time, just as people can leave their homes for a period of time (see the above discussion of the “intermediate state”). Further, he contrasts “tent” homes with “building” homes to indicate that the “building” is the home (that is, body) that will last forever and which believers should long for. If possible, preserve the “home” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tent]])<br><br>### Bodies as clothing<br><br>In [5:2–4](../05/02.md), Paul mixes “clothing” language in with his “home” language. The “clothes” are bodies, and Paul again uses this language to indicate that people belong in bodies (“clothed”), not without bodies (“naked” or “unclothed”). He does not use “clothing” language to show that bodies are an unimportant part of who people are. If possible, preserve the “clothing” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. However, if how Paul mixes together “home” and “clothing” language would be confusing, you may need to use only the “home” language and express the “clothing” language plainly or as “home” language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/clothed]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Exclusive “we”<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). However, he does not necessarily mean that what he says is not true of the Corinthians or of believers in general. Consider how you can communicate the focus on Paul and those with him without totally excluding the Corinthians. In every case where Paul may be using the first person plural in a way different than this, a note will explain the options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])<br><br>### Singular nouns in general statements<br><br>In [5:1–10](../05/01.md), Paul consistently refers to “body,” “building,” “tent,” and “home” in singular form. He does this because the singular form was a natural way to refer to these things in general. Throughout this section, the UST models how to express the ideas in plural form, since this is more natural for general statements in English. Consider how your language might naturally express a general statement about “bodies.” <br><br>### Translating [5:21](../05/21.md)<br><br>Paul speaks in a very compressed way in this verse, and Christians disagree about what exactly he means. What is relatively clear is that Paul has in mind what some people call an “interchange” between Christ and believers. Christ, who is “righteous,” is somehow identified with “sin,” and believers, who are “sinners,” are somehow identified with “righteousness.” The “in him” at the end of the verse indicates that this “interchange” occurs in union with Christ. For details about what it could mean for Christ to be “made sin” and for believers to “become the righteousness of God,” see the notes on this verse. If possible, however, your translation should be as general as Paul’s sentence. This means that you should express the general idea of “interchange” and allow for many of the possible interpretations listed in the notes.
2CO	5	1	p7b7	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	(1) an explanation of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “In fact,” (2) an example or illustration of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “For example,” (3) a basis for what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	5	1	v03z	figs-exclusive	οἴδαμεν & ἡμῶν & ἔχομεν	1		Here and throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. See the chapter introduction for more information on how to translate these words. Here, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel … our … we have” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us know … our … we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	5	1	la71	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν	1		Here, the word **if** could introduce: (1) something that Paul thinks will definitely happen, but he is not sure when. Alternate translation: “whenever” (2) something that Paul thinks might happen. Alternate translation: “even if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	5	1	z4vs	figs-exmetaphor	ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν, οἰκίαν ἀχειροποίητον αἰώνιον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1	if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyed, we have a building from God	Here Paul speaks as if a person’s body were a **house**, **tent**, or **building** that the person lives in. This was a common way to refer to a person’s body in Paul’s culture. He identifies the current body as a **tent** that is **torn down** because this body will die. He describes the body that a person will have when God resurrects them as a **building from God** and an **eternal house** that is **not made with hands**. This is an important metaphor in [5:1–9](../05/01.md), so preserve the **house**, **tent**, and **building** language if possible. If it would be helpful, you could use a simile or identify what the **house** is in another natural way. Alternate translation: “our earthly house of this tent, that is, our mortal body, is torn down, we have a building from God, that is, our resurrection body, an eternal house in the heavens, not made with hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2CO	5	1	zy2k	figs-activepassive	ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ	1	if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone tears down our earthly house of this tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	1	bvz6	figs-possession	ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους	1		Here, Paul uses the possessive form identify the **earthly house** as a **tent**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “our earthly house, which is a tent,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	5	1	gz3c	grammar-collectivenouns	ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν & οἰκίαν & αἰώνιον	1		Here and throughout [5:1–8](../05/01.md), Paul uses the singular form to refer to “bodies” in general, sometimes described as buildings or clothing. See the chapter introduction for more information. Consider what would be natural in your language and use that form throughout these verses. Alternate translation: “our earthly houses of these tents are torn down … buildings … eternal houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
2CO	5	1	xifl	figs-explicit	ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1		Many people in Paul’s culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual heavens. Here, Paul refers to how the **eternal house** can be found **in the heavens**. Since Paul does not include details about the heavens, translate **heavens** with a word or phrase that refers to all of heavenly space, including the idea of multiple heavens if possible. Alternate translation: “in the heavenly realm” or “in the heavenly spaces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	1	bqi5	figs-synecdoche	ἀχειροποίητον	1	It is a house not made by human hands	Here, the word **hands** refers to the main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **hands** refers to “humans” in general, not just their hands. Alternate translation: “not made by humans” or “not made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2CO	5	1	bbvr	figs-activepassive	ἀχειροποίητον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which hands did not make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	2	mt4s	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ γὰρ	1		Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous verse (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	5	2	tc2j	writing-pronouns	ἐν τούτῳ	1	in this tent we groan	Here, the phrase **in this** could refer to: (1) the earthly house that is a tent, that is, the person’s current body. Alternate translation: “in this tent” or “in our bodies on earth” (2) the current time period. Alternate translation: “right now” or “in this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	5	2	yg6y	figs-exmetaphor	ἐν τούτῳ στενάζομεν, τὸ οἰκητήριον ἡμῶν τὸ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐπενδύσασθαι ἐπιποθοῦντες	1		Here Paul continues to refer to mortal bodies and resurrection bodies as “houses” or “dwellings.” You should express the idea as you did in [5:1](../05/01.md). Paul also begins to refer to receiving new, resurrection bodies as if they were clothing that people could put on. This also is an important figure of speech for the following verses, so preserve the language if possible. If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea in another natural way that fits with the “building” language. Alternate translation: “in this house, that is, our mortal body, we groan, longing to completely live in our dwelling that is from heaven, that is, our resurrection body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2CO	5	2	ss6g	figs-activepassive	ἐπενδύσασθαι	1	longing to be clothed with our heavenly dwelling	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “for God to fully clothe us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	3	bjau	figs-exmetaphor	ἐνδυσάμενοι, οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα	1		Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as if they were clothing. You should express the idea as you did in [5:2](../05/02.md). Alternate translation: “we have a house to live in, we will not be found homeless” or “having a new body that is like clothing, we will not be found naked, that is, without a body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2CO	5	3	da0z	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴ γε & ἐνδυσάμενοι	1		Here Paul is speaking as if **having clothed ourselves** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will actually be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “when” or “whenever.” Alternate translation: “when indeed we have clothed ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	5	3	i4es		ἐνδυσάμενοι	1	we have put it on	Here Paul could mean that: (1) **we** clothe **ourselves**. Alternate translation: “we clothe ourselves” (2) God clothes “us.” Alternate translation: “God clothes us”
2CO	5	3	ap7v	figs-activepassive	οὐ & εὑρεθησόμεθα	1	we will not be found to be naked	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **naked** rather than on who “finds” them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **found**. Alternate translation: “we will not be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	4	zvz8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ γὰρ	1		Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous two verses (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	5	4	bz6k	figs-exmetaphor	οἱ ὄντες ἐν τῷ σκήνει & οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι	1	while we are in this tent	Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as buildings and clothing. You should express the ideas as you did in [5:1–3](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “the ones being in this tent, that is, our mortal body … we do not want to be homeless, but to have a home” or “the ones being in this tent, that is, this body … we do not want to have no body, which is like being unclothed, but to have a resurrection body, which is like being fully clothed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2CO	5	4	e34b	figs-metaphor	βαρούμενοι	1	in this tent, we groan	Here Paul speaks as if he and those with were carrying a heavy “burden.” He means that something is making their lives difficult. The “burden” could be: (1) how the **tent**, that is, their current bodies, fall apart and die. Alternate translation: “being distressed by it” (2) how other people situations make life hard for them. Alternate translation: “being troubled by many people and things” or “being oppressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	5	4	g9yu	figs-activepassive	βαρούμενοι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that either the **tent** (their mortal bodies) or other people and things did it. Make sure your translation fits with how you chose to express the metaphor in the previous note. Alternate translation: “the tent burdening us” or “many people and things burdening us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	4	f8rb	figs-activepassive	οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι	1	We do not want to be unclothed … we want to be clothed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **unclothed** or **clothed** rather than on whoever clothes or unclothes them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **unclothed** and **clothed**. Alternate translation: “we do not want to be naked, but to have clothes on” or “we do not want to have no clothing, but to wear clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	4	nezo	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι	1		This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we want to be fully clothed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	5	4	n78p	figs-nominaladj	τὸ θνητὸν	1	to be unclothed	Paul is using the adjective **mortal** as a noun in order to refer to all bodies that are **mortal**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the mortal bodies” or “what is mortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2CO	5	4	uiei	translate-unknown	τὸ θνητὸν	1		Here, the word **mortal** identifies something that will die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes things that die. Alternate translation: “what will die” or “things liable to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	5	4	e5zi	figs-activepassive	καταποθῇ τὸ θνητὸν ὑπὸ τῆς ζωῆς	1	so that what is mortal may be swallowed up by life	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “life may swallow up the mortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	4	de2b	figs-metaphor	καταποθῇ	1	so that what is mortal may be swallowed up by life	Here Paul refers to **the mortal** as if it were food that could be **swallowed up**. This illustrates that **the mortal** has been defeated as surely as if **life** devoured it as food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “may be destroyed” or “may be taken over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	5	4	y0db	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ζωῆς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live” or an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “what is alive” or “what lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	5	x35l	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	5	5	m2id	figs-explicit	κατεργασάμενος ἡμᾶς	1		Here, the phrase **having prepared** could refer to how God: (1) has acted in believers’ lives to get them ready for resurrection and new life. Alternate translation: “having gotten us ready” (2) created believers when they first began to live. Alternate translation: “having created” or “having made us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	5	xr9o	writing-pronouns	αὐτὸ τοῦτο	1		Here, the phrase **this very thing** refers back to what Paul said in the previous verse about receiving a new body in place of the one that people have now (see [5:4](../05/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what the phrase refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “receiving resurrection bodies” or “this new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	5	5	n20x	figs-distinguish	ὁ δοὺς	1		Here Paul adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2CO	5	5	g7yj	figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	who gave us the Spirit as the down payment	Here, Paul is speaking of the **Spirit** as if he were a **down payment**, that is, a partial payment for a purchase with a promise to pay the rest of the amount on a future date. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “a guarantee, which is the Spirit, that he will also give us eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	5	5	kyyw	figs-possession	τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to the **down payment** as the **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit as a down payment” or “the down payment that is the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	5	6	clh5	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in [5:1–6](../05/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	5	6	xjg3		καὶ εἰδότες	1		Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a reason why they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “because we know” (3) something that is true even though they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “even though we know”
2CO	5	6	bde4	figs-infostructure	θαρροῦντες & πάντοτε, καὶ εἰδότες ὅτι ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου;	1		Paul never gives a main verb to go with these statements. Instead, he introduces a parenthetical statement in the following verse and then ends the sentence. At the beginning of [5:8](../05/08.md), he repeats the word that is translated **courageous** here, which indicates that he is going to resume speaking about what he started speaking about in this verse. If you can clearly indicate that Paul does not finish this sentence, you could use that form here, as the ULT does by using a dash. If your readers would find this structure confusing, you could make this verse a complete thought on its own. Alternate translation: “we are always courageous and know that being at home in the body, we are away from the Lord,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	5	6	xv3m	figs-exmetaphor	ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	being at home in the body	Here Paul continues to refer to the **body** as if it were a building that a person could be **at home in**. Express the idea as you did in [5:1–2](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “living in the body, as if it were a home, we are not present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2CO	5	6	ebl4	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ σώματι	1	we are away from the Lord	Paul implies that this **body** is the one that people have before they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “in our current body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	7	w885	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **for** introduces an explanation of what it means to be “away from the Lord” (see [5:6](../05/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “that means that” or “thus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	5	7	rfn4	figs-metaphor	περιπατοῦμεν	1	we walk by faith, not by sight	Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were “walking.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or with plain language. Alternate translation: “we act” or “we live our lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	5	7	wok7	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ πίστεως & οὐ διὰ εἴδους	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith** and **sight**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “believe” and “see.” Alternate translation: “by believing, not by seeing” or “by what we believe, not by what we see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	7	n9el	figs-explicit	διὰ πίστεως & οὐ διὰ εἴδους	1		Here, the words **faith** and **sight** could refer to: (1) the acts of “believing” or “seeing” Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus, not by seeing him” (2) what is “believed” or “seen.” Alternate translation: “by what we believe, not by what we see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	8	iq0j	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word **Now** introduces again what Paul started speaking about in [5:16(../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that resumes an earlier idea or thought. Alternate translation: “Again,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	5	8	npio		καὶ	1		Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a contrast with how they are **confident**. Alternate translation: “but” (3) what it is that they are **confident** about. Alternate translation: “enough that we”
2CO	5	8	a6au		εὐδοκοῦμεν, μᾶλλον	1	we would rather be away from the body	Alternate translation: “would prefer”
2CO	5	8	i3m3	figs-exmetaphor	ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος καὶ ἐνδημῆσαι πρὸς τὸν Κύριον	1	at home with the Lord	Here Paul continues to refer to the **body** as if it were a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “not to live in the body as if it were a home and to be present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2CO	5	8	bca2	figs-explicit	ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος	1		Here, the word **body** refers to the body that people have before they die. The phrase **be away from the body** could refer to: (1) a temporary situation between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back in which the believer does not have a body but is still **with the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to be without a body for now” (2) the eternal situation of believers, in which they either have no bodies or have new bodies. Alternate translation: “to be away from this body forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	9	owmc	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ καὶ	1		Here, the phrase **And therefore** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has already said, particularly in [5:6–8](../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “And so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	5	9	ejd1	translate-unknown	φιλοτιμούμεθα	1		Here, the word **aspire** refers to earnestly desiring or seeking after something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses a strong desire or goal. Alternate translation: “we earnestly seek” or “we greatly desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	5	9	ml5j	figs-explicit	εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες	1	whether we are at home or away	Here Paul could be referring to how people are **at home** or **away** from: (1) the Lord. Alternate translation: “whether being at home with the Lord or being away from him” (2) this body. Alternate translation: “whether being at home in this body or being away from it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	9	gadz	figs-exmetaphor	εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες	1		Here Paul continues to refer a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md), [8](../05/08.md). Make sure that your translation matches fits with what you chose in the previous note about whether Paul implies “body” or “Lord” here. Alternate translation: “whether being in the body as if it were a home or out of the body” or “whether being present or being absent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
2CO	5	9	j1sl	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1	to be pleasing to him	Here, the word **him** refers to the “Lord” whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse, that is, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	5	10	k0qb	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “aspire to be well-pleasing” to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We aspire to that because” or “After all,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	5	10	awq4	figs-exclusive	τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς	1		Here, the word **us** could refer to: (1) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us who believe” (2) all humans. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	5	10	uv7o	figs-activepassive	τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς φανερωθῆναι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) we “reveal” ourselves. Alternate translation: “us all to reveal ourselves” or “us all to stand” (2) God “reveals” us. Alternate translation: “God to reveal us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	10	kdf2	figs-explicit	ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	before the judgment seat of Christ	Here, the phrase **judgment seat** refers to a raised seat that a judge or official would sit on when he or she was making official decisions. In Paul’s culture, people expected the Messiah to sit on this kind of seat when this world ends and decide whether to reward or punish people. Paul uses this idea to refer to how Jesus will “judge” **us all**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or refer more directly to how **Christ** will “judge.” Alternate translation: “before the judgment seat that Christ will sit on when he returns” or “before Christ to be judged by him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	10	c499	figs-metaphor	κομίσηται & τὰ διὰ τοῦ σώματος	1	each one may receive back the things done in	In this context, the phrase **receive back** refers to getting something in payment or in return for something else. Paul is speaking as if everyone **will receive back** as payment or recompense exactly what they did **through the body**. By this, Paul means that God will reward or punish everyone in a way that fits with what they did. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “may receive a punishment or reward that fits what they did through the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	5	10	v8sl	figs-activepassive	τὰ	1	the things done in the body	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that **each one** did it. Alternate translation: “what he or she has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	10	cr07	figs-idiom	διὰ τοῦ σώματος	1		Here, the phrase **through the body** clarifies that **the {things done}** are what people did while they had mortal bodies and lived on this earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to what people do in their current bodies. Alternate translation: “with their earthly bodies” or “before they died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	5	10	nhwf	figs-explicit	πρὸς ἃ ἔπραξεν	1		Here, the phrase **with regard to what things he did** introduces what **Christ** is judging. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the basis of what things he did” or “being judged based on what he did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	10	izpv	figs-gendernotations	ἔπραξεν	1		Although the word **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she did” or “that person did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	5	10	lsh8	figs-explicit	εἴτε ἀγαθὸν εἴτε κακὸν	1	whether for good or for bad	Here, the words **good** or **bad** could describe: (1) the things that people did. Alternate translation: “whether those things were good or bad” (2) both the things that people did and what they **receive back**. Alternate translation: “whether good things deserving commendation or bad things deserving rebuke” (3) just what people **receive back**. Alternate translation: “whether reward or rebuke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	11	hszo	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1		Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in [5:10](../05/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	5	11	dzh5	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰδότες	1	knowing the fear of the Lord	Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason for why Paul and those with him **persuade men**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	5	11	pa4j	figs-possession	τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **fear** that is directed toward **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the fear that is directed to the Lord” or “the fear that we experience for the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	5	11	e0c9	figs-abstractnouns	τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **fear**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “fear.” Alternate translation: “how we fear the Lord” or “what it is to fear the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	11	qm34	figs-explicit	ἀνθρώπους πείθομεν	1	we persuade people	Here Paul could be implying that he “persuades” people: (1) to know **the fear of the Lord** as he and those with him do. Alternate translation: “we persuade men also to know the fear of the Lord” (2) to realize that he and those with him are people who know **the fear of the Lord** and are thus trustworthy. Alternate translation: “we persuade men that we are those who fear the Lord” or “we persuade men that we are trustworthy” (3) to accept the gospel. Alternate translation: “we persuade men to believe the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	11	b7dd	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how they **persuade men**. In contrast with that, they do not need to persuade God, since they are already **clearly known** by him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	5	11	v11v	figs-activepassive	Θεῷ & πεφανερώμεθα & πεφανερῶσθαι	1	What we are is clearly seen by God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God knows us clearly … that you know us clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	11	qb7z	figs-explicit	πεφανερώμεθα & ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι	1		Here Paul does not state what it is about them that is **clearly known**. Paul implies that **God** knows that they are faithful to him and preach the good news properly. Paul wants the Corinthians to recognize this also. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we are clearly known to be faithful … to be clearly known in your consciences as faithful” or “we are clearly known to preach the truth … to be clearly known in your consciences as one preaching the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	11	y5l1	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν	1	that it is also clear to your conscience	Here, the word **consciences** identifies the parts of people that can identify and recognize what is right and wrong. Paul refers to the **consciences** here because he wants the Corinthians to think about whether Paul and those with him are truly trustworthy or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the part of the person that decides what is right and wrong, or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “in your hearts” or “by you as consider us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	5	12	r7sg	figs-infostructure	οὐ πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλὰ ἀφορμὴν διδόντες ὑμῖν καυχήματος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, ἵνα ἔχητε πρὸς τοὺς ἐν προσώπῳ καυχωμένους, καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ	1		If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the order of the elements here. Alternate translation: “We are giving you an opportunity of boasting on our behalf, so that you may have an answer for the ones boasting in appearance and not in heart. It is not that we are again commending ourselves to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	5	12	yk4m	translate-unknown	οὐ πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνομεν	1		Here, phrase **commending ourselves** refers to the practice of stating why one should be trusted and welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to giving reasons why people should welcome and trust a person. See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “We are not again speaking favorably of ourselves” or “We are not again vouching for ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	5	12	ufwe	figs-explicit	πάλιν	1		Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. See how you translated the similar form in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	12	m6sy	figs-abstractnouns	ἀφορμὴν διδόντες ὑμῖν καυχήματος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **opportunity**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “enable” or “equip.” Alternate translation: “are equipping you for boasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	12	c134	figs-possession	ἀφορμὴν & καυχήματος	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **opportunity** that is for **boasting**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “an opportunity for boasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	5	12	mza1	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχητε πρὸς	1	so you may have an answer	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **answer**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “answer” or “respond.” Alternate translation: “you may be able to answer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	12	e6k6	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν προσώπῳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **appearance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “appear” or “look.” Alternate translation: “what people look like” or “how things appear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	12	ikd5	figs-ellipsis	μὴ ἐν	1		This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “not boasting in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	5	12	it2r	figs-metonymy	ἐν καρδίᾳ	1	those who boast about appearances but not about what is in the heart	In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “in mind” or “in who they really are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	5	13	ys3l	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said “boasting” in the previous verse. In this verse, he indicates that he acts in certain ways **for** the Corinthians, even if he acts in other ways **for God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	5	13	e4mp	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴτε	-1		Here, the word **if** in both places introduces situations that Paul thinks has happened. He is not using **if** to introduce things he thinks might happen. If your language does not use the conditional form for things that definitely happened, you could use another form that refers to alternate situations. Alternate translation: “whenever … whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	5	13	cy57	figs-idiom	ἐξέστημεν & σωφρονοῦμεν	1	if we are out of our minds … if we are in our right minds	Here Paul uses two opposite phrases. These phrases could contrast: (1) fanatical or extreme behavior with moderate or sane behavior. Alternate translation: “we are fanatical … we are moderate” (2) ecstatic or visionary behavior with rational or normal behavior. Alternate translation: “we see visions … we have control of our minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	5	13	b4ri	figs-explicit	Θεῷ & ὑμῖν	1		Here, the phrases **for God** and **for you** could indicate: (1) the people for whose benefit Paul is behaving in these ways. Alternate translation: “it is for God’s sake … it is for your sake” (2) the people to whom he directs his behavior. Alternate translation: “it is in our relationship with God … it is in our relationship with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	14	a5w7	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul acts in the ways that he does (see [5:13](../05/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “We do those things because” or “We act in those ways because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	5	14	azi9	figs-possession	ἡ & ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the love of Christ	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **love** that could be: (1) **love** that **Christ** has for Paul and those with him. Alternate translation: “the love Christ has for us” (2) **love** that Paul and those with him have for **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the love we have for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	5	14	gjmd	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note about whose **love** this is. Alternate translation: “how Christ loves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	14	y3hj	translate-unknown	συνέχει	1		Here, the word **controls** refers to how something forces or directs a person to act in a certain way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that expresses this idea clearly. Alternate translation: “constrains” or “compels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	5	14	l1y6		κρίναντας	1		Here, the phrase **having judged** could introduce: (1) what he and those with him think about how **the love of Christ controls** them. Alternate translation: “and we have judged” or “as we judge” (2) a reason why **the love of Christ controls** them. Alternate translation: “because we have judged”
2CO	5	14	ig7l	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο, ὅτι	1		Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul is about to say, what he introduces with the word **that**. This form was powerful in his culture. If it would not be powerful in your culture, and if your readers might find both **this** and **that** confusing, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “that” or “what follows:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	5	14	nd9g	figs-nominaladj	εἷς	1	died for all	Paul is using the adjective **one** as a noun in order to refer to **Christ**, who is **one** person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase, and you could make explicit to whom **one** refers. Alternate translation: “one human” or “one human, Christ,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2CO	5	14	crsa	figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ	1		Here, the phrase **for the sake of** could indicate that Jesus **died**: (1) to benefit or help others. Alternate translation: “to save” or “for the benefit of” (2) instead of or in place of others. Alternate translation: “in place of” or “instead of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	14	trmb	figs-nominaladj	πάντων & οἱ πάντες	1		Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to refer to **all** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all humans … all humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2CO	5	14	ocra	figs-extrainfo	πάντων & οἱ πάντες	1		Here, the word **all** could refer in general to all humans, or it could refer more specifically to all humans who believe in Jesus. Since Paul did not clarify which he meant, if possible you also should use a general word that could be interpreted in either way. Alternate translation: “everyone … everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2CO	5	14	nezi	figs-metaphor	οἱ πάντες ἀπέθανον	1		Here Paul speaks as if **all died** because or when Jesus **died**. Since the following verse states that some people are still “living,” he cannot mean that every person has physically **died**. He may mean that people have **died** to sin, or that they participated in how Christ **died**, or that who they used to be **died**. Since some or all of these interpretations are possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea in a form that could allow for several of these interpretations, such as in simile form. Alternate translation: “in a way, all died” or “all died in a manner of speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	5	15	h831	figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ	-1	him who for their sake died and was raised	Here, much like in [5:14](../05/14.md), the word **for** could indicate that Jesus **died**: (1) to benefit or help others. Alternate translation: “to save … to save” or “for the benefit of … for the benefit of” (2) instead of or in place of others. Alternate translation: “in place of … in place of” or “instead of … instead of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	15	b5d1	figs-nominaladj	πάντων	1		Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to refer to **all** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2CO	5	15	rbbw	figs-extrainfo	πάντων	1		Here, just as in [5:14](../05/14.md), the word **all** could refer in general to all humans, or it could refer more specifically to all humans who believe in Jesus. Express the idea as you did in [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2CO	5	15	s4yr	figs-explicit	οἱ ζῶντες	1		Here, the phrase **the ones living** could identify people who: (1) have spiritual life, that is, those who have received new life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones having new life” (2) have physical life, that is, who have not died. Alternate translation: “those who are alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	15	bc7p	figs-idiom	μηκέτι ἑαυτοῖς ζῶσιν, ἀλλὰ τῷ	1		Here, to **live for** a person refers to acting in a way that pleases or fulfills that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “should live no longer to please themselves, but to please the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	5	15	g9k4	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τῷ	1		This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but they should live for the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	5	15	ri6f	writing-pronouns	τῷ	1	for them	Here, the word **one** refers to the same person that **he** refers to at the beginning of the verse: Jesus the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom **one** refers. Alternate translation: “for the Messiah, the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	5	15	h52q	figs-idiom	ἐγερθέντι	1		Paul uses the word **raised** to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use this word to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having been restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	5	15	aovc	figs-activepassive	αὐτῶν & καὶ ἐγερθέντι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “them, the one whom God raised” or “them, whom God raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	16	ic21	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	For this reason	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference conclusion from what Paul has said, especially referring back to [5:14–15](../05/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from previous claims. Alternate translation: “So then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	5	16	f2ww	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν & νῦν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **now** could refer to: (1) the time when **we** believed. Alternate translation: “starting when we believed, … since then” (2) the time in which Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “from the present moment on … right now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	16	efn1	figs-idiom	ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν	1		Here, the phrase **from now on** refers to a specific moment in time (**now**) and the all time that follows that moment (**on**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “starting right now,” or “now and in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	5	16	t1cc	figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	-1		Here Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to human definitions … according to human definitions” or “according to what humans value … according to what humans value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	5	16	y8mk	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ	-1		Paul is speaking as **if** it were a possibility that **we regarded Christ according to the flesh** in the past, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word or phrase such as “although” or “despite the fact that.” Alternate translation: “Even though” or “Despite the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	5	17	yx28	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		Here, the word **Therefore** could introduce an inference from: (1) [5:16](../05/16.md). In this case, Paul is saying that “regarding” Christ in a new ways indicates that a person is also a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “Regarding Christ in this new way shows that” (2) [5:14–15](../05/14.md). In this case, Paul is saying that how Christ died for people causes them to be a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “Because Christ died for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	5	17	khzj	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ	1		Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that being **in Christ** leads to being **a new creation**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “supposing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
2CO	5	17	wark	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, indicates that a person believes in Christ and is a Christian. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the person is a Christian, someone who is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “is a Christian” or “is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	5	17	af1b	figs-gendernotations	καινὴ κτίσις	1		Although the word **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” or “he or she is a new creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	5	17	tl3h	figs-ellipsis	καινὴ κτίσις	1	he is a new creation	Here Paul does not directly what state what is **a new creation**. He could be implying that: (1) the person **in Christ** is a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” (2) the world is a **new creation**, and the person can experience that when he or she is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “there is a new creation” or “that person experiences the new creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	5	17	rt67	figs-abstractnouns	καινὴ κτίσις	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **imitators**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “create.” Paul could be focusing on: (1) what is created. Alternate translation: “he is something that God has newly created” (2) the act of creating. Alternate translation: “God has newly created him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	17	ue8f	figs-explicit	τὰ ἀρχαῖα & καινά	1	The old things have passed away	Here, the phrases **old things** and **new things** could refer to: (1) things that characterize a person and their life. Alternate translation: “The things of the old life … things of the new life” (2) the world and how a person experiences it. Alternate translation: “The things of the old world … things of the new world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	17	vpe3	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	See	Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen. Alternate translation: “listen up” or “hear me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2CO	5	17	d7i9		γέγονεν καινά	1		Here, the phrase **new things** could be: (1) the subject of **have come**. Alternate translation: “new things have happened” (2) the object of **have come**, and the subject is the person who is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “he has become new”
2CO	5	17	izkz	translate-textvariants	γέγονεν καινά	1		Some early manuscripts include the word “all” in this clause, so that it reads, “all things have become new.” Consider whether translations that your readers might be familiar with include “all.” Otherwise, it is recommended that you follow the ULT here, since the best manuscripts do not include “all.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2CO	5	18	whyb	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	5	18	jyf7	figs-explicit	τὰ & πάντα	1	All these things	Here, the phrase **all these things** could refer to: (1) the “new creation” and “new things” that Paul mentioned in [5:17](../05/17.md). Alternate translation: “all these new things” (2) everything that exists. Alternate translation: “all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	18	s1q2	figs-distinguish	τοῦ καταλλάξαντος	1		Here Paul adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has reconciled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2CO	5	18	u66s	figs-possession	τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify a **ministry** whose goal or aim is **reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that accomplishes this reconciliation” or “the ministry that leads to this reconciliation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	5	18	lj2h	figs-abstractnouns	δόντος ἡμῖν τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς	1	the ministry of reconciliation	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ministry** and **reconciliation**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “minister” and “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “having commissioned us to minister so that God reconciles people to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	19	o5j8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὡς ὅτι	1		Here, the phrase **namely, that** introduces more information about the “ministry of this reconciliation” that Paul mentioned in [5:18](../05/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information or further explanation. Alternate translation: “that is, that” or “and by this I mean that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	5	19	payo	figs-infostructure	Θεὸς ἦν ἐν Χριστῷ & καταλλάσσων	1		Here, **in Christ** could modify: (1) **reconciling**, so that God **was reconciling** by means of or through **Christ**. In this case, Paul is saying something about how **God** accomplishes the reconciliation. Alternate translation: “in Christ God was reconciling” (2) **was**, so that God was **in Christ**, and he was **reconciling** while he was acting **in Christ**. In this case, Paul is saying something about the relationship between **Christ** and **God**, namely that **Christ** is **God**. Alternate translation: “God was in Christ, reconciling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	5	19	sfrj	figs-metaphor	Θεὸς & ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains the means by which God accomplishes the “reconciliation.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that God “reconciles” people by uniting them to Christ. Alternate translation: “God, by uniting people to Christ,” or “God by means of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	5	19	w1d1	figs-metonymy	κόσμον	1	in Christ God is reconciling the world to himself	Here, the word **world** could refer to: (1) the people in the **world**. Alternate translation: “all people” (2) the **world** as a whole, including people, places, and things. Alternate translation: “everything he created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	5	19	joj6	figs-infostructure	μὴ λογιζόμενος αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν, καὶ θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς	1		Here Paul may have intended that: (1) **not counting** and **having placed** both introduce ways that God **was reconciling**. Alternate translation: “and he did that by not counting their trespasses against them and by placing in us the word of reconciliation” (2) **not counting** further defines **reconciling**, and **having placed** introduces an action parallel to **reconciling**. Alternate translation: “that is, not counting their trespasses against them, and he was placing in us the word or reconciliation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	5	19	mckq	figs-idiom	μὴ λογιζόμενος αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν	1		Here Paul speaks as if God could keep a “count” of people’s **trespasses**, which means that he would keep track of everything that a person did wrong in order to condemn them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to keeping track of or condemning people for what they have done wrong. Alternate translation: “not keeping track of their trespasses” or “not using their trespasses to condemn them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	5	19	a1io	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν	1		Here, the words **their** and **them** refers to the people who live in **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “the trespasses of the people in the world … them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	5	19	bpnh	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **trespasses**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “transgress.” Alternate translation: “how they transgressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	19	b62q	figs-metaphor	θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν	1	He is entrusting to us the message of reconciliation	Here Paul speaks as if **the word of reconciliation** were an object that God would “place in” Paul and those with him. He means that God has called or commissioned them to proclaim this **word of reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having given to us” or “having called us to proclaim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	5	19	om5s	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1		Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	5	19	ix97	figs-possession	τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς	1	the message of reconciliation	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **word** about **reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the word about reconciliation” or “the word concerning reconciliation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	5	19	zuoe	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς καταλλαγῆς	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reconciliation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “about how God reconciles the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	20	wg8f	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore, we are ambassadors for Christ	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul said in the previous verse about how God “placed in us the word of reconciliation” (see [5:19](../05/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	5	20	q9u9		ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ	-1	representatives of Christ	Here, the phrase **on behalf of** could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him represent **Christ**. Alternate translation: “who act for Christ … as those who act for Christ” (2) Paul and those with him act for the benefit of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Christ … for the sake of Christ”
2CO	5	20	uqy7		ὡς	1		Here, the phrase **as though** introduces the implication or meaning of being **ambassadors on behalf of Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an implication or explanation. Alternate translation: “and so” or “which means that”
2CO	5	20	lr70	figs-infostructure	παρακαλοῦντος δι’ ἡμῶν; δεόμεθα ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ, καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ	1		Here, the clause **We implore {you} on behalf of Christ** could be: (1) the introduction to what Paul and those with him say as God **is appealing** through them. Alternate translation: “is appealing through us as we implore you on behalf of Christ, ‘Be reconciled to God!’” (2) part of what **God is appealing through us**. Alternate translation: “is appealing through us when we say, ‘We implore you on behalf Christ: be reconciled to God!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	5	20	me5z	figs-explicit	παρακαλοῦντος	1		Here Paul does not state to whom **God is appealing**. He could imply that he **is appealing** to: (1) everyone. Alternate translation: “is appealing to all people” (2) the Corinthians specifically. Alternate translation: “is appealing to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	20	eoef	figs-explicit	δεόμεθα	1		Here what Paul says could be addressed to: (1) the Corinthians specifically. Alternate translation: “We implore you Corinthians on behalf of Christ” (2) every person with whom Paul and those with him speak. Alternate translation: “We implore everyone we meet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	20	t7be	figs-quotations	Χριστοῦ, καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “Christ that you should be reconciled to God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2CO	5	20	a6fx	figs-activepassive	καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ	1	Be reconciled to God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Corinthians do it to themselves. Alternate translation: “Reconcile yourselves with God” (2) God does it. Alternate translation: “Let God reconcile you to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	5	21	jp2a	writing-pronouns	τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν & ἐποίησεν & ἐν αὐτῷ	1	The one who did not know sin, he made sin for us	Here, the words **one** and **him** refer to Jesus the Messiah. The word **he** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who did not know sin, God made … in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	5	21	qim8	figs-idiom	τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν	1		Here, the phrase **having known sin** refers to committing or doing **sin**. It does not refer just to knowing about **sin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to committing **sin**. Alternate translation: “The one not having done sin” or “The one not having sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	5	21	oxvb	figs-metaphor	ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν	1		Here Paul speaks as if God **made** Jesus **sin**. He could mean that God: (1) treated Jesus like he was a sinner. Alternate translation: “he regarded as a sinner” (2) identified Jesus with sinners and sin. Alternate translation: “he made like a sinner” (3) caused Jesus to be a sin offering. Alternate translation: “he made a sin offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	5	21	dmjk	figs-explicit	ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1		Here, the phrase **for us** could indicate that God made Jesus **sin**: (1) to benefit or help **us**. Alternate translation: “for our sake” or “for our benefit” (2) instead of or in place of **us**. Alternate translation: “in place of us” or “instead of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	5	21	pix7	figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks as if people could become **the righteousness of God**. He could mean that **we**: (1) share the **righteousness** that God gives to those who believe. Alternate translation: “we might share in the righteousness of God” (2) are declared “righteous” by God. Alternate translation: “we might be declared to have the righteousness of God” (3) become those who live “righteously.” Alternate translation: “we might act according to the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	5	21	kmt9	figs-possession	δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ	1	so that we might become the righteousness of God in him	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **righteousness** that could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “righteousness from God” (2) belong to **God**. Alternate translation: “God’s own righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	5	21	ebz2	figs-abstractnouns	ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ	1	The one who did not know sin	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous.” Make sure your translation fits with how you understand what **righteousness of God** means. Alternate translation: “God might make us righteous” or “we might be righteous because of what God does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	5	21	cypg	figs-metaphor	ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in him** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in him**, or united to Christ, explains how people **become the righteousness of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ is the means by which people receive the **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “by being united to him” or “as God unites us to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	6	intro	f5qu			0		# 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)<br>      * The gospel (5:11–6:2)<br>      * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)<br>      * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [6:16–18](../06/16.md).<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Commendation of ministry<br><br>In [6:3–4](../06/03.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he avoids doing anything that would cause offense and lead to people blaming ministry. In fact, he and those with him “commend themselves” in many ways, and he provides a list of those ways in [6:4–10](../06/04.md). Paul commends their ministry in this way because other people in Corinth were claiming that Paul was not a good apostle or minister for Christ. They claimed that they were better ministers for Christ. Paul responds here by listing what he and those with him do and experience as true ministers of Christ. Make sure that you express the list so that it shows that Paul and those with him are true ministers of Christ. <br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### “Weapons of righteousness”<br><br>In [6:7](../06/07.md), Paul states that he and with him “weapons of righteousness” for both hands. He could mean that “righteousness”: (1) is the “weapons” (2) is defended by the “weapons” (3) characterizes the “weapons.” Also the idea that the “weapons” are for both hands could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him have an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other hand (2) Paul and those with him can defend against enemies coming from any direction. Paul does not state whom he is fighting against with these “weapons,” but it is probably sin, evil powers, and people who oppose his ministry. See the notes on this verse for translation options. <br><br>### “Opening” the heart<br><br>In [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks about “opening” the heart and, in contrast, being “restricted.” He is speaking about loving other people as if it were an “open” heart and failing to love other people as it were a “restriction” in one’s insides. If your culture can express the idea of love by referring to where in their bodies people feel love, you could do so in these verses. Otherwise, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. <br><br>### The temple of the living God<br><br>In [6:16](../06/16.md), Paul claims that believers are “the temple of the living God.” In the last part of the verse, he quotes from the Old Testament to prove that this is true. This quotation also shows that the identification of God’s people with the temple indicates that God is with his people and treats them as his people. Since the temple is a very important part of Paul’s culture, you should preserve the temple language. If your readers would not understand the metaphor, you could express it as a simile or explain it in a footnote. See the notes on this verse for translation options. <br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In [6:14–16](../06/14.md), Paul asks five questions, and each question assumes that the answer is “none” or “nothing.” Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as negative statements. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### The long list in [6:4–10](../06/04.md)<br><br>These verses contain one long list of the situations and ways in which Paul and those with him commend their ministry. This list is divided into three parts. Each part uses a repeated form for each item. The first part uses the word “in” ([6:4–7a](../06/04.md)), the second part uses the word “through” ([6:7b–8a](../06/07.md)), and the third part uses the words “as” and “yet” or “but” ([6:8b–10](../06/08.md)). If possible, represent these parts in your language by using repeated words or some other natural form. Consider whether a long list like this would be natural in your language. The UST models one possible way to divide the list up into shorter sentences. <br><br>### Exclusive “we”<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	6	1	kf1d	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verses, especially from [5:20–21](../05/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	6	1	tbr6	figs-explicit	συνεργοῦντες	1	Working together	Here Paul does not directly state **with** whom he is **working**. He could be implying that he works **with**: (1) God, since God is the subject of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (2) the Corinthians, since they are the ones ho is “urging.” Alternate translation: “working together with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	6	1	x4hc	figs-exclusive	καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν	1		Here and throughout this chapter, **we** does not include the Corinthians. The first person plural could refer to: (1) Paul and those who work with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the good news also urge” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I also urge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	6	1	s8db	figs-doublenegatives	καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν μὴ εἰς κενὸν τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ δέξασθαι ὑμᾶς	1	we also urge you not to receive the grace of God in vain	Here Paul uses two negative terms, **not** and **in vain**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you could instead use one positive term. Alternate translation: “we also urge you to receive the grace of God so that it has results” or “we also urge you to receive the grace of God so that it produces its goal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2CO	6	1	wdla	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **gracious**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “act kindly” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “how God acts kindly” or “how God acts graciously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	1	pdgo	figs-idiom	εἰς κενὸν	1		Here, **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, receiving **the grace of God** will not lead to salvation if the Corinthians do not persevere in living as those who have received **the grace of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	6	2	ooms	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Corinthians should “receive the grace of God” (see [6:1](../06/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reason for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	6	2	u9kc	writing-quotations	λέγει	1	For he says	Here, the phrase **he says** introduces words that God speaks in the Scriptures. Specifically, Paul is quoting from a Greek translation of [Isaiah 49:8](../isa/49/08.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you use a form that indicates that God speaks these words that come from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “according to Isaiah the prophet God says,” or “God speaks these words through Isaiah:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2CO	6	2	uqu5	figs-quotations	λέγει & καιρῷ δεκτῷ ἐπήκουσά σου, καὶ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας ἐβοήθησά σοι.	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he says that at an acceptable time he listened to you, and in a day of salvation he helped you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2CO	6	2	pp3i	figs-parallelism	καιρῷ δεκτῷ ἐπήκουσά σου, καὶ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας ἐβοήθησά σοι. ἰδοὺ, νῦν καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος; ἰδοὺ, νῦν ἡμέρα σωτηρίας	1		The two clauses in the quotation mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Make sure that you use the same form for Paul’s interpretation of the quotation, which is also in parallel form. Alternate translation: “At an acceptable time I listened to you; yes, in a day of salvation I helped you. Behold, now is a favorable time; yes, now is a day of salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2CO	6	2	kilf	figs-idiom	καιρῷ δεκτῷ	1		Here, the phrase **an acceptable time** refers to a point in time that someone considers to proper or appropriate for doing something. Paul could be implying that this **time** is **acceptable** to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “At a time that I considered right” or “At a time appropriate for me” (2) people. Alternate translation: “At a time that people considered right” or “At a time appropriate for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	6	2	iz3h	figs-explicit	ἐπήκουσά σου	1		Here, the word **listened** indicates that God both listened and responded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that God did not just “listen” but also acted in response. Alternate translation: “I answered you” or “I listened to you and responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	6	2	be7i	figs-yousingular	σου & σοι	1		Because God is speaking to one person, his special servant, **you** in the quotation is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2CO	6	2	z6w6	figs-idiom	ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας	1		Here, the phrase **day of salvation** refers to the time when God will bring **salvation** for his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for this idea. Alternate translation: “in the time of salvation” or “at the time when I gave salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	6	2	qrdt	figs-abstractnouns	σωτηρίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “when I saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	2	sa94	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ, νῦν	-1	Look	Here, the words **Behold** and **Look** draw the attention of the audience and ask them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with words or phrases that ask the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statements that follow. Alternate translation: “Pay attention! Now … Pay attention! Now” or “Listen, now … Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2CO	6	2	j4k4		καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος & ἡμέρα σωτηρίας	1		Here, the phrases **a day of salvation** and **a favorable time** repeat the words from the quotation exactly, except Paul uses a word that emphasizes that the **time** is good (**favorable**) instead of just appropriate (**acceptable**). Use the form that you used in the quotation, although if possible use a word for “good” **time** instead of just **acceptable time**. Alternate translation: “is a time that God considers good … is a time of salvation” or “is a time appropriate for God … is a time when God gives salvation”
2CO	6	3	shtt	figs-infostructure	διδόντες	1		Here, the word **giving** goes with the clause “we also urge you” in [6:1](../06/01.md). It introduces an explanation of how Paul and those with him serve God. In most languages, it is best to begin a new sentence with this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly links back to “we also urge” from [6:1](../06/01.md). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to end the previous verse with a period. Alternate translation: “As we urge you to receive the grace God, we give” or “As we serve God, we give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	6	3	v3wc	figs-idiom	μηδεμίαν & διδόντες προσκοπήν	1	We do not place a stumbling block in front of anyone	Here, the phrase **giving no cause for offense** refers to how a person acts so that others are not offended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “avoiding provoking others” or “doing nothing that could cause offense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	6	3	c9kr	figs-abstractnouns	προσκοπήν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **offense**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “offend” or “upset.” Alternate translation: “cause to be offended” or “reason to be upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	3	sv9d	figs-explicit	ἐν μηδενὶ	1		Here, the phrase **in anything** could refer to: (1) actions and behavior. Alternate translation: “in whatever we do” (2) people. Alternate translation: “among anybody” or “to any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	6	3	he3c	figs-activepassive	μὴ μωμηθῇ ἡ διακονία	1	our ministry might not	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) other people would do it. Alternate translation: “others might not blame our ministry” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might not blame our ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	6	3	fkf9	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ διακονία	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **ministry**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “minister.” Alternate translation: “how we minister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	3	winz	translate-unknown	μὴ μωμηθῇ	1		Here, the word **blamed** refers to how people criticize something or find fault with it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “might not be critiqued” or “might not be condemned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	6	4	xd9l	translate-unknown	συνιστάντες ἑαυτοὺς	1	General Information:	Here, the phrase **commend ourselves** refers to the practice of stating why one should be trusted and welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to giving reasons why people should welcome and trust a person. Alternate translation: “we present ourselves favorably” or “we vouch for ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	6	4	p6pl	figs-explicit	ἐν παντὶ συνιστάντες ἑαυτοὺς ὡς Θεοῦ διάκονοι	1		Here the word **as** could introduce: (1) who they are (**servants of God**) while they **commend** themselves. Alternate translation: “we who are servants of God commend ourselves in everything” (2) what it is that they must **commend** themselves to be. Alternate translation: “we commend ourselves in everything, proving that we are servants of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	6	4	p9up	figs-possession	Θεοῦ διάκονοι	1	we commend ourselves in everything as God’s servants	Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer **servants** who serve **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “servants for God” or “God’s servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	6	4	faw1	figs-infostructure	Θεοῦ & ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν	1		Here, the phrase **in much endurance** could go with: (1) the list that follows. In this case, the list gives the situation in which they have **much endurance**. Alternate translation: “of God; we have much endurance in” (2) **we commend ourselves**. In this case, the phrase gives an explanation for how they **commend** themselves, and the list gives the situations in which this occurs Alternate translation: “of God by having much endurance; we show this in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	6	4	xyf9	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις	1	God’s servants; in much endurance, affliction, distress, hardship	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **endurance,** **tribulations**, **hardships**, and **distresses**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “enduring at all times while we are persecuted, pressured, and distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	4	ndmv	figs-doublet	ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις	1		Here, the words **tribulations**, **hardships**, and **distresses** function together to refer to many different kinds of persecution and suffering. It is possible that **tribulations** refers to direct persecution, **hardships** refers to being forced to do something difficult, and **distresses** refers to being unable to do what one wants. If you do not have three words for these categories, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could use one or two words or phrases to refer to suffering and persecution. Alternate translation: “in persecutions, in suffering” or “in every tribulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2CO	6	5	ded3	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πληγαῖς, ἐν φυλακαῖς, ἐν ἀκαταστασίαις, ἐν κόποις, ἐν ἀγρυπνίαις, ἐν νηστείαις	1		If your language does not express some of these ideas with nouns, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “in being beaten, in being imprisoned, in being mobbed, in working hard, in sleeping little, in being hungry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	5	r2fj	translate-unknown	πληγαῖς	1		Here, the word **beatings** refers to when a person strikes another person multiple times, usually with a stick or rope. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of action. Alternate translation: “whippings” or “floggings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	6	5	onzg	translate-unknown	ἀκαταστασίαις	1		Here, the word **riots** refers to how a large of people become upset about something and as a group hurt people and property. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this behavior. Alternate translation: “dangerous mobs” or “violent disturbances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	6	5	t43d	translate-unknown	ἀγρυπνίαις	1		Here, the word **sleeplessness** refers to not getting any or enough sleep. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “sleep deprivation” or “a lack of sleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	6	6	w84c	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἁγνότητι, ἐν γνώσει, ἐν μακροθυμίᾳ, ἐν χρηστότητι, ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, ἐν ἀγάπῃ ἀνυποκρίτῳ	1	in purity … in genuine love	If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases or adjectives. Alternate translation: “we are pure, knowledgeable, patient, kind, filled with the Holy Spirit, sincerely loving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	6	k3c5	translate-unknown	ἁγνότητι	1		Here, the word **purity** refers to a state that is not qualified by evil or shameful things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a lack of these things. Alternate translation: “virtue” or “innocence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	6	6	e2lc		ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1		Here, the phrase **in the Holy Spirit** could refer to: (1) having the power or help of the **Holy Spirit**. Alternate translation: “in the power of the Holy Spirit” (2) being “holy” in one’s “spirit.” Alternate translation: “in holiness of spirit”
2CO	6	6	mwzw	translate-unknown	ἀγάπῃ ἀνυποκρίτῳ	1		Here, the word **sincere** indicates that the **love** is focused only on loving others and not on what one might gain from loving others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes the idea clear. Alternate translation: “love that is not hypocritical” or “love with pure motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	6	7	b6am	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας, ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ	1	in the word of truth, in the power of God	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **truth** and **power**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “in the word about what is true, in God empowering us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	7	cr55	figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1		Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	6	7	dui6	figs-possession	ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας	1	in the word of truth	Here Paul could use the possessive to describe: (1) a **word** about the **truth**. Alternate translation: “in the word about the truth” (2) a **word** that is characterized by **truth**. Alternate translation: “the truthful word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	6	7	p5l5	figs-possession	ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ	1	in the power of God	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **power** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “in the power that comes from God” or “in power given by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	6	7	ef5b	figs-metaphor	διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν	1	the weapons of righteousness	Here speaks as if **righteousness** were **weapons** for **the right hand and the left**. He means that the righteous way in which he and those with him live their lives is like armor and swords which they use to protect themselves and fight against enemies. Paul does not state who the enemy is, but he implies that it is anyone and anything that acts against God and the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with simile form or in plain language. Alternate translation: “through righteousness, which is like weapons for the right hand the left” or “through righteousness, which protects us from God’s enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	6	7	gg43	figs-possession	τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **weapons** that could: (1) be **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons, which are righteousness,” (2) come from or because of **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons that righteous provides” or “the weapons that come from righteousness” (3) defend or fight for **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons to defend righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	6	7	ozxm	figs-abstractnouns	τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous” or an adverb such as “righteously.” Alternate translation: “weapons, that is, how we live righteously,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	7	ijr2	figs-explicit	τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν	1	for the right hand and for the left	Here, having **weapons** for **the right hand and the left** could describe how a soldier: (1) has an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other. Alternate translation: “of righteous, both a sword and a shield” or “of righteousness for attack and defense” (2) is completely equipped for battle and able to defend against attacks from **right** and **left**. Alternate translation: “of righteous for defense on all sides” or “of righteousness with which we are fully equipped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	6	8	ftu0	figs-explicit	διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας, διὰ δυσφημίας καὶ εὐφημίας	1		In these two statements, Paul indicates that he and those with him persevere in serving God whether people think and say good or bad things about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “whether we receive honor or dishonor, whether there are bad reports or good reports about us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	6	8	m51w	figs-abstractnouns	δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **honor** and **dishonor**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “honor” and “dishonor.” Alternate translation: “being honored and dishonored” or “others glorifying us and disgracing us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	8	fedq	figs-explicit	ὡς πλάνοι καὶ ἀληθεῖς	1		Here and in the following two verses Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** or “but” to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be deceivers, but actually true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	6	8	e4pf	figs-nominaladj	ἀληθεῖς	1	as imposters	Paul is using the adjective **true** as a noun in order to identify himself and those with him as those who “truly” are who they say they are. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “truthful people” or “telling the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2CO	6	9	niij	figs-explicit	ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι, ὡς ἀποθνῄσκοντες καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν, ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι	1		Here and in the following verse Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** or “but” to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be unknown, but actually well known; considered to be dying, but actually—behold!—living; considered to be being disciplined, but actually not being put to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	6	9	fcb5	figs-activepassive	ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι	1	as if we were unknown and we are still well known	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that he is: (1) **unknown** to many people but **known** to God. Alternate translation: “many people not knowing us, yet God knowing us well” (2) **unknown** to some people, but **known** to other people. Alternate translation: “some people not knowing us, yet others knowing us well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	6	9	x7bu	figs-exclamations	καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν	1		Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “yet, and listen to this, living” or “yet most certainly living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2CO	6	9	r1d9	figs-activepassive	ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι	1	as being punished, and yet not being killed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that: (1) God does them. Alternate translation: “God disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (2) other people do them. Alternate translation: “people disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	6	9	nqcv	figs-abstractnouns	μὴ θανατούμενοι	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die” or “kill.” Alternate translation: “yet not being killed” or “not dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	10	so04	figs-explicit	ὡς λυπούμενοι ἀεὶ δὲ χαίροντες, ὡς πτωχοὶ πολλοὺς δὲ πλουτίζοντες, ὡς μηδὲν ἔχοντες καὶ πάντα κατέχοντες	1		Here, just as in the previous verse, Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** or **but** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be sorrowful, but actually always rejoicing; considered to be poor, but actually making many rich; considered to have nothing, but actually possessing all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	6	10	vydj	figs-metaphor	πολλοὺς & πλουτίζοντες	1		Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him made other people **rich**. He means that he helps people receive blessings from God, including forgiveness and new life, which makes them spiritually **rich**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “making many spiritually rich” or “enabling many to receive new life, which is like being rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	6	10	pajk	figs-nominaladj	πολλοὺς	1		Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2CO	6	10	fpqg	figs-explicit	πάντα	1		Here Paul could be stating that they “possess”: (1) **all things** that Christ possesses. In other words, because Christ rules over everything, Paul and those with him also “possess” everything. Alternate translation: “all things in Christ” (2) **all** spiritual blessings, which are the important **things**. Alternate translation: “all spiritual blessings” or “everything that is really important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	6	11	mv85	figs-activepassive	τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, Κορίνθιοι, ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται	1	our heart is opened wide	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the actions, Paul implies that he and those with him did them. Alternate translation: “We have opened our mouth toward you, Corinthians; we have opened our heart wide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	6	11	v74j	grammar-collectivenouns	τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν	1	Our mouth has been opened to you	Here Paul is speaking of all of their “mouths” and “hearts,” not of one particular **mouth** or **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “mouths” and “hearts” in general. Alternate translation: “Each of our mouths … each of our hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
2CO	6	11	r815	figs-metonymy	τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν	1		Here, the word **mouth** refers to the action of speaking with the **mouth**, and the word **heart** refers to the act of thinking and feeling with the **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to the actions rather than to where the actions occur. Alternate translation: “Our speaking … our feeling” or “How we speak … how we feel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	6	11	jvak	figs-metaphor	τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		Here Paul speaks as he and those with had **opened** their mouths **toward** the Corinthians. He means that he and those with him have spoken what is true, and they have spoken confidently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Paul could be specifically referring to: (1) how he and those with him have interacted with the Corinthians in the past. Alternate translation: “We have always spoken confidently and truthfully to you” (2) what he has said in this letter so far. Alternate translation: “We have written confidently and truthfully to you ” (3) what he said in [6:3–10](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “We wrote those things to you confidently and truthfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	6	11	w42w	figs-metaphor	ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται	1		Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him have **opened wide** their “hearts” to the Corinthians. He means that they love and care for the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “we have made room in our hearts for you” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	6	12	m2kq	figs-metaphor	οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν	1		Here Paul speaks about loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them (**not restricted**), they are loving and caring for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. Alternate translation: “There is space for you in our hearts, but you do not have space for us in your hearts” or “You are being loved by us, but you are not fully loving us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	6	12	u4fz	figs-activepassive	οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν	1	You are not restrained by us	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We are not restricting you, but your affections are restricting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	6	12	xv9t	translate-unknown	ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν	1	You are not restrained by us, but you are restrained in your affections	Here, the word **affections** refers to the insides of a person where that person feels emotions, particularly emotions related to compassion and love. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these emotions or to the place where people feel these emotions. Alternate translation: “in your love” or “in your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2CO	6	12	p88s	figs-abstractnouns	τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **affections**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “feel.” Alternate translation: “what you feel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	13	ypsz	figs-infostructure	τὴν δὲ αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν (ὡς τέκνοις λέγω) πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς	1		Here, the clause **I speak as to children** is a parenthetical statement that breaks up the sentence to give more information about how Paul is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the clause to wherever it is most natural to put a statement about how one is speaking. Alternate translation: “and—I speak as to children—in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also” or “and in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also—I speak as to children.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	6	13	b62y	figs-explicit	τὴν & αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν	1		Here, the phrase **same exchange** refers to how Paul and those with him have “opened their hearts” (that is, shown love) to the Corinthians. This is the first part of the **exchange**, and now Paul wants the Corinthians to complete this **exchange** by “opening themselves” to Paul and those with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what is being “exchanged” more explicitly. Alternate translation: “now that we have opened our hearts to you, in exchange” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	6	13	zdfh	figs-simile	ὡς τέκνοις λέγω	1		Here Paul indicates that he is speaking as if he were addressing **children**. He could mean that: (1) he is using words and ideas that children use, particularly referring to the idea of **exchange**. Alternate translation: “I am using childish language” or “I speak as children speak to each other” (2) he is speaking to the Corinthians as if he was their father and they were his children. Alternate translation: “I speak to you who are like my own children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2CO	6	13	c6vp	figs-metaphor	πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς	1	open yourselves wide also	Here Paul continues to speak about loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they love and care for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See how you translated the similar clause at the end of [6:11](../06/11.md). Alternate translation: “make space in your hearts also” or “love us also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	6	14	qd33	figs-metaphor	μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες ἀπίστοις	1	be yoked together with	Here Paul refers to a farming practice in which two or more animals were **yoked together** with a piece of wood that was then connected to a plow or cart. In this way, the animals together pulled the plow or cart. Paul applies this farming practice to people to indicate that believers should not accomplish what God wants them to do by working with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not team up with unbelievers” or “Do not have a close relationship with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	6	14	x89j	figs-activepassive	μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that people do it to themselves. Alternate translation: “Do not yoke yourselves together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	6	14	v7kk	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Do not be yoked together with unbelievers	Here, the word **For** introduces a some reasons why the Corinthians should be **yoked** with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reasons for a command. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	6	14	v7pw	figs-rquestion	τίς & μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ, ἢ τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος?	1	For what association does righteousness have with lawlessness?	Here Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using strong negations. Alternate translation: “righteousness and lawlessness cannot have partnership! Nor can light and darkness have fellowship!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	6	14	n5so	figs-abstractnouns	τίς & μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **partnership**, **righteousness**, and **lawlessness**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “can righteous people and lawless people partner” or “can what is righteous partner with what is lawless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	14	xr52	figs-abstractnouns	τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος?	1	For what fellowship does light have with darkness?	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **fellowship**, **light**, and **darkness**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “can what is bright go together with what is dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	14	h9ks	figs-metaphor	τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος?	1		Here Paul speaks about how **light** and **darkness** do not have **fellowship**. He could be speaking about: (1) things and people that are good (**light**) and things and people that are evil (**darkness**). Alternate translation: “what fellowship do good people have with evil people” (2) God’s kingdom and people (**light**) and Satan’s kingdom and people (**darkness**). Alternate translation: “what fellowship does God’s kingdom have with Satan’s kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	6	15	r1vq	figs-rquestion	τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ, ἢ τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου	1	What agreement can Christ have with Beliar?	Here, just as in [6:14](../06/14.md), Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using strong negations. Alternate translation: “And Christ has no harmony with Beliar! Nor does a believer have a share with an unbeliever!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	6	15	f832	figs-abstractnouns	τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **harmony**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “agree” or “go together.” Alternate translation: “And does Christ go together with Beliar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	15	rm3r	translate-names	Βελιάρ	1	Beliar	Here, the word **Beliar** is another name for the devil, who is also called Satan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote or short phrase that clarifies that **Beliar** is another name for Satan. Alternate translation: “Beliar, that is, Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2CO	6	15	jdq6	figs-abstractnouns	τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **share**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “share.” Alternate translation: “what does a believer share with an unbeliever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	15	z9iv	figs-genericnoun	τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου	1	Or what share does a believer have together with an unbeliever?	Here Paul is speaking of “believers” and “unbelievers” in general, not of one particular **believer** and one particular **unbeliever**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to “believers” and “unbelievers” in general. Alternate translation: “what share does any believer have with any unbeliever” or “what share do believers have with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2CO	6	16	y99x	figs-rquestion	τίς δὲ συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων?	1	And what agreement is there between the temple of God and idols?	Here, just as in [6:14–15](../06/14.md), Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “And the temple of God has no agreement with idols!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	6	16	m658	figs-abstractnouns	τίς & συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **agreement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “agree.” Alternate translation: “does the temple of God agree with idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	6	16	jc79	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said about **the temple of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Now” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	6	16	s3l8	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we are the temple of the living God	Here, the word **we** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	6	16	aqql	figs-metaphor	ἡμεῖς & ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος	1		Here Paul speaks as if **we** were a **temple**. He explains this metaphor with the following quotation, which illustrates how God dwells with his people as their God. Since the **temple** is an important building in Paul’s culture, if possible you should preserve the language. If necessary, you could express the idea by using a simile form. Alternate translation: “we are like the temple of the living God” or “the living God dwells with us as if we were his temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	6	16	oc16	figs-idiom	Θεοῦ & ζῶντος	2		Here, the phrase **the living God** identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that God actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	6	16	es7t	writing-quotations	καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ Θεὸς	1		Here, the phrase **just as God said** introduces a quotation that supports what Paul has said about how **we are the temple of the living God**. The words Paul quotes could come from [Leviticus 26:12](../lev/26/12.md); [Jeremiah 31:33](../jer/31/33.md); and [Ezekiel 37:27](../ezk/37/27.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the words that God speaks are from the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “just as God spoke through the prophets” or “as God spoke in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2CO	6	16	l298	figs-quotations	εἶπεν & ὅτι ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω, καὶ ἔσομαι αὐτῶν Θεός, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔσονταί μου λαός	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “said that he would dwell among them, and walk among them; and he would be their God, and they themselves would be his people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2CO	6	16	u5g3	figs-parallelism	ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω	1	I will dwell among them and walk among them.	These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will dwell among them; yes, I will walk among them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2CO	6	16	g0nl	figs-metaphor	ἐνπεριπατήσω	1		Here the author of the quotation speaks as if God would **walk** among his people. He means that God will be as close to his people as if he was “walking” around with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. Alternate translation: “spend time with them” or “be close to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	6	16	vy1b	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ ἔσονταί	1		Here, the word translated **themselves** switches focus from **God** to **they**. Consider using a natural way to switch the focus to **they** in your language. Alternate translation: “it is they who will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2CO	6	17	fe1z	writing-quotations	διὸ & λέγει Κύριος	1	General Information:	Here Paul uses the words **Therefore** and **says the Lord** to introduce a quotation that provides a result or inference from what Paul said in the previous verse. Most of the quotation is from [Isaiah 52:11](../isa/52/11.md), but the phrase **and I will welcome you** is from a Greek translation of [Ezekiel 20:34](../ezk/20/34.md). The ULT indicates that the quote is from two different passages by using new quotation marks with the last line. However, it is recommended that you treat the whole verse as one quote in your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce the quote in a natural way that shows it comes from the Old Testament. It may be more natural to move **says the Lord** to the beginning of the verse, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “Because of that … the Lord says {through the prophets}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2CO	6	17	vkex	figs-quotations	διὸ ἐξέλθατε ἐκ μέσου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀφορίσθητε, λέγει Κύριος, καὶ ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε; κἀγὼ εἰσδέξομαι ὑμᾶς	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “Therefore the Lord says that you should come out from the midst of them, and be separate, and touch no unclean thing, and he will welcome you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2CO	6	17	peek	figs-parallelism	ἐξέλθατε ἐκ μέσου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀφορίσθητε	1		Here, these two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Come out from the midst of them; yes, be separate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2CO	6	17	z5ld	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν	1	be separate	Here, the word **them** refers to people who do not follow God and who do not trust the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun refers. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers” or “of the people who do not follow God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	6	17	vfie	figs-metonymy	ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε	1		Here the author of the quotation uses the word **touch** to refer to interacting with someone in any way, not just by “touching” it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “interact with no unclean thing” or “avoid every unclean thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	6	17	jg48	grammar-connect-logic-result	κἀγὼ	1		Here, the word **and** introduces what happens when people do what God commanded in the first part of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that more clearly introduces a result. Alternate translation: “and then I” or “and when you do those things, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	6	18	ft65	writing-quotations	καὶ	1		Here uses the word **And** to introduce another quote from the Old Testament, specifically from [2 Samuel 7:8](../2sa/07/08.md) and [2 Samuel 7:14](../2sa/07/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “Again, as you can read in the Scriptures,” or “Even more, as it is written,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2CO	6	18	o9h6	figs-quotations	καὶ ἔσομαι ὑμῖν εἰς πατέρα, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔσεσθέ μοι εἰς υἱοὺς καὶ θυγατέρας, λέγει Κύριος Παντοκράτωρ.	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you do, you may need to introduce the quote more clearly and specify to whom **I** refers. Alternate translation: “And it is written that God will be to you as a Father, and you will be to him as sons and daughters, as the Lord Almighty says.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2CO	6	18	dks6	figs-parallelism	ἔσομαι ὑμῖν εἰς πατέρα, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔσεσθέ μοι εἰς υἱοὺς καὶ θυγατέρας	1		These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will be to you as a Father; yes, you will be to me as sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2CO	7	intro	hg36			0		# 2 Corinthians 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)<br>      * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)<br>5. Paul rejoices about Titus’ visit to the Corinthians (7:5–16)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Boasting<br><br>In [7:4](../07/04.md), [14](../07/14.md), Paul refers to how he boasts about the Corinthians. What he means is that he tells people about how wonderful and great he thinks they are. It is important to indicate that Paul is not describing the Corinthians as better than they actually are. Rather, Paul indicates in [7:14](../07/14.md) that what he says about them is actually true. Use a word or phrase that refers to saying good things that are true about someone else. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])<br><br>### Encouragement and comfort<br><br>The words for “encouragement” and “comfort” are very closely related. Sometimes it is not clear whether Paul is focusing more on the encouragement (which implies urging someone to act) or more on the comfort (which implies making someone feel better). If you have a word or phrase that can indicate both comfort and encouragement, you could use it in this chapter. Otherwise, consider which emphasis the context implies. Generally, the ULT models one option, and the UST models the other option. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/comfort]])<br><br>### The previous letter<br><br>In [7:8–12](../07/08.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. He has already referred to this letter in chapter 2. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter to help them do what was right. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians.<br><br>### Grief and sorrow<br><br>The words for being “grieved” and for “sorrow” are very closely related. Paul uses these words to refer to being hurt or feeling upset about something. Paul distinguishes between two kinds of “sorrow”: one that is with respect to God or godly, the other that is with respect to the world or worldly. If possible use a word or words that are general enough to refer to both kinds of “sorrow.” <br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Exclusive “we”<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians except in [7:1](../07/01.md). You should assume that Paul only means himself and those with him unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])<br><br>### Switches between first person singular and first person plural<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul switches between singular forms (“I”) and plural forms (“we”) of the first person. These switches are probably not just stylistic. Rather, they indicate when Paul is referring just to himself and when he is referring to himself and those who serve with him. If possible, preserve these switches in your translation. <br><br>### What happened in Corinth<br><br>In this chapter, Paul continues to refer to something that happened in Corinth, something he already discussed in chapter 2. However, Paul gives even less details than he did in chapter 2 about what happened. What we know is that a person, probably a man, from the Corinthians’ group did something wrong and hurt some of the Corinthians and possibly also Paul. Paul in response wrote a severe letter, which “grieved” the Corinthians. Paul also sent Titus to Corinth to make sure that everything was resolved. In this chapter, Paul especially focuses on how happy he was to hear what Titus told him about how the Corinthians responded. Avoid providing more details in this chapter than Paul does, but make sure that your translation generally refers to events like these.
2CO	7	1	h5xv	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Beloved	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he said in [6:16–18](../06/16.md) about being God’s temple and family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “On account of those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	7	1	k46r	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἔχοντες	1		Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why believers should **cleanse** themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	7	1	tytd	figs-abstractnouns	ταύτας & ἔχοντες τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “having been promised these things” or “God having pledged these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	1	pw5n	figs-explicit	ταύτας & τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1		Here Paul is referring to the **promises** from the Old Testament that he quoted in [6:16–18](../06/16.md), which indicate that believers are God’s people, that God will welcome them, and that they are God’s sons and daughters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly refers back to those **promises**. Alternate translation: “the promises that I have quoted” or “those promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	1	gwjt	figs-exclusive	καθαρίσωμεν ἑαυτοὺς	1		By **us** and **ourselves**, Paul means himself, those with him, and the Corinthians, so use the inclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	7	1	fv49	figs-abstractnouns	παντὸς μολυσμοῦ σαρκὸς	1	let us cleanse ourselves	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **defilement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “defile” or “corrupt.” Alternate translation: “anything that corrupts flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	1	f00w	figs-explicit	σαρκὸς καὶ πνεύματος	1		Here Paul uses the word **flesh** to refer to the outward part of people, particularly the body. He uses the word **spirit** to refer to the inward part of people, the part that thinks, feels, and makes decisions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to similar parts of the person. Alternate translation: “of body and soul” or “of the physical and the spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	1	turq		ἐπιτελοῦντες	1		Here, the word **perfecting** could introduce: (1) another thing that believers should do while they are “cleansing” themselves. Alternate translation: “and let us perfect” or “as we perfect” (2) the result of the “cleansing.” Alternate translation: “so that we perfect” (3) how they “cleanse” themselves. Alternate translation: “by perfecting”
2CO	7	1	c2xf	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιτελοῦντες ἁγιωσύνην	1	perfecting holiness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **holiness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “holy.” Alternate translation: “perfecting how holy we are” or “growing to be perfectly holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	1	pt41	figs-possession	φόβῳ Θεοῦ	1	in the fear of God	Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **fear** that is directed toward **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. See how you translated the similar phrase “fear of the Lord” in [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “the fear that is directed to God” or “the fear that we experience for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	7	1	xlet	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν φόβῳ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind fear, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “fear.” Alternate translation: “in how we fear God” or “through fearing God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	2	x55b	figs-exclusive	χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς; οὐδένα ἠδικήσαμεν, οὐδένα ἐφθείραμεν, οὐδένα ἐπλεονεκτήσαμεν	1		Here and in the rest of the chapter, by **us** and **we**, Paul means himself and those with him but not the Corinthians, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	7	2	c2yz	figs-metaphor	χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς	1		Here, just as in [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks of loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they are loving and caring for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. Alternate translation: “Show love for us” or “Make room in your hearts for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	7	2	v4nu	figs-doublet	οὐδένα ἠδικήσαμεν, οὐδένα ἐφθείραμεν, οὐδένα ἐπλεονεκτήσαμεν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul uses three phrases with similar structure and meaning to strongly deny that he did anything to hurt any of the Corinthians. It is possible that the word **wronged** refers to doing something unjust, the word **ruined** refers to corrupting or perverting someone, and the phrase **took advantage of** refers to gaining money or things from somebody without doing anything in return. If the repetition would not communicate a strong denial in your language, or if you do not have three words for these ideas, you could express the idea with only one or two strong clauses. Alternate translation: “We wronged and took advantage of no one” or “We did not hurt any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2CO	7	3	pgze	figs-explicit	οὐ λέγω	1		Here Paul refers to what he said in the previous verse about how he and those with him did not hurt anyone ([7:2](../07/02.md)). Here he wishes to clarify that he does not mean that it was the Corinthians who hurt people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “I did not speak what I just spoke” or “I did not write that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	3	bhb7	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς κατάκρισιν	1	I do not speak for your condemnation	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **condemnation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to condemn you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	3	ckpm	figs-explicit	προείρηκα	1		Here Paul refers back to what he said in [6:11](../06/11.md): “our heart has been opened wide.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “I told you earlier in this letter” or “I wrote above in this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	3	fay3	figs-metaphor	ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν ἐστε	1	you are in our hearts	Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were in the **hearts** of him and those with him. He means that they love the Corinthians very much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you are in our affections” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	7	3	xzg3	figs-idiom	εἰς τὸ συναποθανεῖν καὶ συνζῆν	1	for us to die together and to live together	Here Paul refers to two extreme alternates, dying and living, to indicate that nothing that happens will keep him and those with him from loving the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “come what may” or “whatever may happen to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	7	4	uamr	figs-abstractnouns	πολλή μοι παρρησία πρὸς ὑμᾶς, πολλή μοι καύχησις ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confidence** and **boasting**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “I am very confident about you; I boast greatly on your behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	4	yp45	figs-explicit	μοι παρρησία πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		Here Pal could be saying that he: (1) is confident that they follow Christ and do what is right. Alternate translation: “is my confidence that you follow Christ” or “is my confidence that you are doing well” (2) can speak boldly or confidently to them. Alternate translation: “is my boldness in speaking to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	4	mh12	figs-activepassive	πεπλήρωμαι τῇ παρακλήσει	1	I am filled with encouragement	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the Corinthians did it. Alternate translation: “You have filled me with encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	7	4	k5t2	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ παρακλήσει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **encouragement**, you could express the idea by using a verbal form such as “comfort” or “cheer up.” Alternate translation: “how you comfort me” or “by how you cheer me up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	4	mx9b	figs-metaphor	ὑπερπερισσεύομαι τῇ χαρᾷ	1	I overflow with joy	Here Paul speaks as if he were “overflowing” with **joy**. He means that he has so much **joy** that he feels like it has completely filled him up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am incredibly joyful” or “I have so much joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	7	4	mr75	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπερπερισσεύομαι τῇ χαρᾷ	1	even in all our afflictions	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **joy**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rejoice” or an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “I overflow as I rejoice” or “I overflow with how joyful I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	5	rt1p	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ γὰρ	1		Here, the phrase **For even** introduces further explanation of the “afflictions” that Paul mentioned in [7:4](../07/04.md). However, Paul is also speaking again about what he said in [2:13](../02/13.md) about traveling to Macedonia. Consider a natural way to reintroduce Paul’s travel plans, and if possible, use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation of the “afflictions.” Alternate translation: “Speaking of afflictions, I will tell you more about my journeys:” or “Now as for the travels I have spoken about,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	7	5	f3c5	figs-go	ἐλθόντων ἡμῶν εἰς	1	When we came to Macedonia	Here the phrase **having come to** refers to traveling from somewhere else to **Macedonia**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “having traveled to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2CO	7	5	c8ju	figs-synecdoche	ἡ σὰρξ ἡμῶν	1	our flesh had no rest	Here, the phrase **our flesh** refers to the whole person. Paul uses it to emphasize the physical or bodily nature of their suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the whole person and not just their **flesh**. Alternate translation: “we ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2CO	7	5	zwwy	figs-explicit	οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν	1		Here Paul continues what he was saying in [2:13](../02/13.md) about how he “had no relief” in his “spirit.” What he means is that traveling to **Macedonia** did not help with his concerns about Titus or his sufferings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “had no relief from our sufferings and worries at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	5	byp3	figs-abstractnouns	οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **relief**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “relieve” or “rest.” Alternate translation: “was not relieved at all” or “could not rest at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	5	h3cv	figs-activepassive	θλιβόμενοι	1	we were troubled in every way	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “experiencing afflictions” or “people afflicting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	7	5	i4wr	figs-explicit	ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι	1	by conflicts on the outside and fears on the inside	Here, the word **without** identifies the source of the **conflicts** as external to Paul and those with him. The word **within** identifies the source of the **fears** as internal to Paul and those with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that similarly identify internal and external sources. Alternate translation: “conflicts from others, fears from ourselves” or “conflicts on the outside, fears on the inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	5	zkqr	figs-abstractnouns	ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **conflicts** and **fears**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “quarrel” and “fear.” Alternate translation: “people fought us without, and we feared within” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	6	qdto	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1		Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with the “conflicts” and “fears” that Paul described in the previous verse ([7:5](../07/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “In spite of that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	7	6	p3fw	figs-distinguish	ὁ παρακαλῶν τοὺς ταπεινοὺς	1		Here Paul adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who is the one who comforts the humble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2CO	7	6	oe9w	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ταπεινοὺς	1		Paul is using the adjective **humble** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **humble**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the humble people” or “those who are humble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2CO	7	6	uujt		ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ Τίτου	1		Alternate translation: “by sending Titus to us”
2CO	7	7	z6jd	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει ᾗ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **comfort**, you could express the idea in another natural way. Alternate translation: “by how” or “by what you did so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	7	w7td	figs-activepassive	παρεκλήθη ἐφ’ ὑμῖν	1	by the comfort that Titus had received from you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you comforted him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	7	7	nypy		ἀναγγέλλων	1		Here, the word **reporting** introduces how Paul knows about the **comfort** that the Corinthians gave to Titus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally introduces how Paul knows about what happened in Corinth. Alternate translation: “since he reported” or “which we heard about when he reported”
2CO	7	7	ljis	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ὑμῶν ἐπιπόθησιν, τὸν ὑμῶν ὀδυρμόν, τὸν ὑμῶν ζῆλον ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **longing**, **mourning**, and **zeal**, you could express the idea in another natural way. Alternate translation: “how you longed for me, how you mourned, and how you were anxious to do what I asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	7	hzt6	figs-explicit	τὴν ὑμῶν ἐπιπόθησιν, τὸν ὑμῶν ὀδυρμόν, τὸν ὑμῶν ζῆλον ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ	1		Here, the phrase **for my sake** modifies all three items in this list. The Corinthians experience **longing** to see Paul, they experience **mourning** because they grieved Paul, and they have **zeal** for Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “your longing for me, your mourning concerning me, and your zeal for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	7	xojr	figs-activepassive	με & χαρῆναι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the Corinthians or their actions did it. Alternate translation: “you caused me to rejoice” or “what you did caused me to rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	7	7	fifc	figs-explicit	μᾶλλον	1		Here, Paul speaks about how his “joy” after Titus’ report is **even more** than the joy that he already described in [7:4](../07/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the comparison more explicit. Alternate translation: “even more than I already had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	8	zuvp	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1		Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s explanation of why he “rejoices even more” (see [7:7](../07/07.md)). This explanation continues in [7:9](../07/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is why I rejoice even more:” or “That is because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	7	8	ptq2	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ	1		Here Paul is speaking as if grieving them were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it was actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “although” or “though.” Alternate translation: “although” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	7	8	lzww	figs-explicit	τῇ ἐπιστολῇ & ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη	1		Here Paul again refers to a letter that he previously sent to them. See how you referred to this letter in [2:3–9](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “my previous letter … the letter” or “the letter that I sent you before … that letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	8	wlbh	figs-infostructure	εἰ καὶ μετεμελόμην (βλέπω ὅτι ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη, εἰ καὶ πρὸς ὥραν ἐλύπησεν ὑμᾶς)	1		Here, the phrase **Even though I did regret {it}** could go with: (1) “now I rejoice” in [7:9](../07/09.md). In other words, although Paul may have regretted sending the letter, now he rejoices. Alternate translation: “Although I did regret it—I see that that letter grieved you, if only for an hour—” (2) **seeing**. In other words, Paul may have regretted sending the letter because “saw” that it **grieved** the Corinthians. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to begin a new sentence with the following verse. Alternate translation: “Even though I did regret it, it was because I see that that letter grieved you, if only for an hour.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	7	8	b552	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ καὶ μετεμελόμην	1		Here, the phrase **Even though** could introduce: (1) something that Paul did not actually do. In other words, Paul wishes to indicate that he might have “regretted” sending the letter, but there is no possibility of that now. Alternate translation: “Even though I might have regretted it” (2) something that Paul did in the past but does not do now. In other words, Paul wishes to indicate that he “regretted” sending the letter after he sent, but he does not regret it now. Alternate translation: “Even though I did regret it then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
2CO	7	8	vk7m	figs-metonymy	βλέπω	1	when I saw that my letter	Here, the word **seeing** refers generally to “knowing” something, not just to looking with one’s eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that clearly refers to knowing. Alternate translation: “I recognize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	7	8	ftuo	translate-textvariants	βλέπω	1		Here, some manuscripts have “for I see,” and a few manuscripts have “seeing.” However, the best manuscripts have “I see.” Unless your readers are already familiar with one of these other wordings, it is best to follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2CO	7	8	b2xj	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ καὶ	3	General Information:	Here Paul is speaking as if being grieved **for an hour** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it was actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “though.” Alternate translation: “though only” or “although just” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	7	8	ob23	figs-idiom	πρὸς ὥραν	1		Here Paul uses the word **hour** to refer to a short period of time, but he does not specify how short. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to a short period of time. Alternate translation: “for a moment” or “for a short while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	7	9	z820	figs-infostructure	οὐχ ὅτι ἐλυπήθητε, ἀλλ’ ὅτι ἐλυπήθητε εἰς μετάνοιαν	1	not because you were distressed	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “that you were grieved to the point of repentance, not that you were grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	7	9	kn5q	figs-activepassive	ἐλυπήθητε	-1	not because you were distressed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he himself or his letter did it. Alternate translation: “I grieved you … I grieved you … I grieved you” or “my letter grieved you … it grieved you … my letter grieved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	7	9	i8n0	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς μετάνοιαν	1	not because you were distressed	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **repentance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “repent.” Alternate translation: “so that you repented” or “in such a way that you repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	9	lmw9		κατὰ Θεόν	1	not because you were distressed	Here, the phrase **with respect to God** indicates that how the Corinthians **were grieved** was how God desires people to be grieved. In other words, their “grief” was pleasing to God or “godly.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses this idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “in a godly way” or “as God approves”
2CO	7	9	cg0o		Θεόν, ἵνα	1	not because you were distressed	Here, the word translated **so that** could introduce: (1) a result. Alternate translation: “God, with the result that” (2) a purpose. Alternate translation: “God in order that”
2CO	7	9	l6d2	figs-explicit	ἐν μηδενὶ ζημιωθῆτε ἐξ ἡμῶν	1	you would not suffer loss in anything through us	Here Paul explains that the Corinthians were not harmed or injured in any way by how they **were grieved**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you did not lose anything because of us” or “you were not harmed in any way by us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	10	y0gi	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For the sorrow that God intends produces repentance that leads to salvation	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([7:9](../07/09.md)) about “grief with respect to God” and how it does not lead to “suffering loss.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	7	10	dtm3	figs-explicit	ἡ & κατὰ Θεὸν λύπη	1	For the sorrow that God intends produces repentance that leads to salvation	Here Paul uses words very similar to those he used in [7:9](../07/09.md): “you were grieved with respect to God.” Use a similar form to what you used there. Alternate translation: “the godly sorrow” or “the sorrow that God approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	10	wmtx	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ & κατὰ Θεὸν λύπη, μετάνοιαν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἀμεταμέλητον ἐργάζεται	1	For the sorrow that God intends produces repentance that leads to salvation	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **sorrow**, **repentance**, **salvation**, and **regret**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “being grieved with respect to God causes people to repent so that they are saved and do not regret being grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	10	lc4m	figs-explicit	ἀμεταμέλητον	1	without regret	Here, the phrase **without regret** could describe: (1) how those who have **sorrow with respect to God** do not experience **regret**. Alternate translation: so there is no regret” (2) how Paul does not have **regret** for how he caused the Corinthians to feel **sorrow**. Alternate translation: “so that I do not have any regret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	10	lc1s	figs-possession	ἡ δὲ τοῦ κόσμου λύπη	1	But the sorrow of the world produces death	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the kind of **sorrow** that the **world** experiences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “But worldly sorrow” or “But the sorrow that is characteristic of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	7	10	t234	figs-metonymy	τοῦ κόσμου	1	But the sorrow of the world produces death	Here, the word **world** refers to the people in the world who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this group of people. Alternate translation: “of unbelievers” or “of other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	7	10	uwz5	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατον κατεργάζεται	1	But the sorrow of the world produces death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “leads these people to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	10	s94l	figs-explicit	θάνατον	1	But the sorrow of the world produces death	Here, the word **death** refers not only to physical **death** but also to spiritual **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “spiritual death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	11	hz1x	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	what earnestness, what eagerness to defend yourselves	Here, the word **For** introduces a specific example of what Paul said in the previous verse about how “sorrow with respect to God works repentance towards salvation” ([7:10](../07/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a specific example, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “In your case,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	7	11	gpp2	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ	1	what earnestness, what eagerness to defend yourselves	Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “look at” or “consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2CO	7	11	uxa4	figs-abstractnouns	αὐτὸ τοῦτο & πόσην κατειργάσατο ὑμῖν σπουδήν	1	what earnestness, what eagerness to defend yourselves	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **earnestness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “earnest.” Alternate translation: “how earnest this same thing caused you to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	11	hpyz	figs-explicit	αὐτὸ τοῦτο τὸ κατὰ Θεὸν λυπηθῆναι & κατειργάσατο ὑμῖν	1	what earnestness, what eagerness to defend yourselves	Here, the phrase **to be made sorrowful with respect to God** further defines what **this same thing** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this relationship in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “this same thing, that is, to be made sorrowful with respect to God, produced in you” or “this same experience of being made sorrowful with respect to God produced in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	11	qnsg	figs-activepassive	λυπηθῆναι	1	what earnestness, what eagerness to defend yourselves	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he himself did it. Alternate translation: “to feel sorrowful” or “that I made you sorrowful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	7	11	t7uk	figs-explicit	κατὰ Θεὸν	1	what earnestness, what eagerness to defend yourselves	Here, just as in [7:9–10](../07/09.md), the phrase **with respect to God** indicates that how the Corinthians were **sorrowful** was how God desires people to be sorrowful. In other words, their “sorrow” was pleasing to God or “godly.” See how you expressed the idea in [7:9–10](../07/09.md). Alternate translation: “in a godly way” or “as God approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	11	h6jc	figs-abstractnouns	ἀλλὰ ἀπολογίαν, ἀλλὰ ἀγανάκτησιν, ἀλλὰ φόβον, ἀλλὰ ἐπιπόθησιν, ἀλλὰ ζῆλον, ἀλλὰ ἐκδίκησιν	1	what avenging of wrong	If your language does not use abstract nouns for some or all of these ideas, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Each of the items in the list refers to one way that the Corinthians responded to the incident that caused Paul to write the previous letter that “grieved” them. Make sure that how you express the Corinthians’ responses fits with this situation. Alternate translation: “you were eager to defend yourselves, you were indignant, you were fearful, you were anxious to see us, you were zealous, and you were quick to punish the wrongdoer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	11	tcvv	figs-explicit	τῷ πράγματι	1	what avenging of wrong	Here, the phrase **this matter** refers to what happened at Corinth that caused Paul to write the previous letter. Paul has already discussed this incident in [2:3–11](../02/03.md), so he simply refers to it here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that similarly refers to something that has already happened and that has already been discussed. Alternate translation: “in this incident” or “in what was done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	12	d4uc	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἄρα	1	your good will toward us should be made known to you in the sight of God	Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or conclusion from what Paul said in [7:8–11](../07/08.md) about the letter and its results. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “As you can see,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	7	12	n0qv	figs-explicit	ἔγραψα	1	your good will toward us should be made known to you in the sight of God	Here, the phrase **I wrote** refers to the previous letter that Paul sent to the Corinthians. See how you translated “I wrote” in [2:3–4](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “I wrote that letter” or “I sent the letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	12	tqcb	figs-activepassive	ἀδικηθέντος	1	your good will toward us should be made known to you in the sight of God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the person **having done wrong** did it. Alternate translation: “whom that person wronged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	7	12	i6sn	figs-activepassive	τοῦ φανερωθῆναι τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν, τὴν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	your good will toward us should be made known to you in the sight of God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he or his letter did it. Alternate translation: “I might reveal to you your earnestness which is on our behalf” or “my letter might reveal to you your earnestness which is on our behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	7	12	rqr2	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν, τὴν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν	1	your good will toward us should be made known to you in the sight of God	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **earnestness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “earnest.” Alternate translation: “how earnest you are on our behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	12	ycy7	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	before God	Here, Paul refers to something being revealed **before God** to indicate a close connection to God. See how you translated the phrase **before God** in [4:2](../04/02.md). The phrase could indicate that: (1) God testifies to or approves the Corinthians’ **earnestness**. Alternate translation: “with God testifying to it” (2) the Corinthians recognize their **earnestness** when they are in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	7	13	afti	writing-pronouns	διὰ τοῦτο	1	For this reason we are encouraged	Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul has said in [7:6–12](../07/06.md) about how the Corinthians treated Titus and how they responded to Paul’s letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you make the reference of **this** more explicit. Alternate translation: “Because of those things” or “Because you responded in those ways,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	7	13	kn2q	figs-activepassive	διὰ τοῦτο παρακεκλήμεθα	1	For this reason we are encouraged	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the Corinthians or their actions did it. Alternate translation: “Because of this, you have encouraged us” or “So then, what you did has encouraged us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	7	13	f3xr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	For this reason we are encouraged	Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	7	13	axyk	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ παρακλήσει ἡμῶν	1	For this reason we are encouraged	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **encouragement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “how we have been encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	13	k6gm	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ χαρᾷ Τίτου	1	For this reason we are encouraged	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **joy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “how joyful Titus was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	13	n69e	figs-metaphor	ἀναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν	1	For this reason we are encouraged	Here Paul speaks as if Titus’ **spirit** were a tired body that needed to be **refreshed**. He could mean that Titus: (1) was encouraged or given new energy. Alternate translation: “he was encouraged by all of you” or “he was energized by all of us” (2) was no longer worried about the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he stopped worrying about all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	7	13	v2g6	figs-activepassive	ἀναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν	1	his spirit was refreshed by all of you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all of you had refreshed his spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	7	14	c72a	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	For if I boasted to him about you	Here, the word **For** introduces another reason why Paul and those with him “rejoiced even more abundantly” ([7:13](../07/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “Also, we rejoiced since,” or “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	7	14	b4uq	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἴ τι αὐτῷ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν κεκαύχημαι, οὐ κατῃσχύνθην	1	For if I boasted to him about you	Paul is speaking as if his boasting about the Corinthians were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He uses this form to introduce what he said about the Corinthians that might have caused him to be **ashamed** if it were not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that Paul did that might have led to being **ashamed**. Alternate translation: “I was not ashamed because of what I had boasted to him about you” or “what I boasted to him about you did not cause me to be ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	7	14	m22c	figs-activepassive	οὐ κατῃσχύνθην	1	I was not embarrassed	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I did not feel shame” or “you did not shame me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	7	14	wrxa	figs-explicit	πάντα & ἐλαλήσαμεν ὑμῖν	1	I was not embarrassed	Here Paul could be referring to: (1) everything he has told the Corinthians, including the gospel. Alternate translation: “we spoke everything we have told you” (2) specifically what he told the Corinthians about his travel plans. Alternate translation: “we spoke to you about our travel plans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	14	t1za	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀληθείᾳ	1	I was not embarrassed	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “truthfully” or “in a truthful way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	14	q5hg	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ καύχησις ἡμῶν ἡ ἐπὶ Τίτου ἀλήθεια ἐγενήθη	1	our boasting about you to Titus proved to be true	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **boasting** and **truth**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what we boasted about became true with reference to Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	15	p2ja	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐστιν	1	the obedience of all of you	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affections**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he loves you more more abundantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	15	qm18	figs-explicit	περισσοτέρως	1	the obedience of all of you	Here, the phrase **more abundant** could indicate that: (1) Titus has more **affections** for them than he did before he visited them. Alternate translation: “more abundant than before” (2) Titus simply has a great deal of **affections**. Alternate translation: “very abundant” or “great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	15	ezep	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀναμιμνῃσκομένου	1	the obedience of all of you	Here, the word **remembering** introduces a reason why Titus’ **affections** are **more abundant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “since he remembers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	7	15	gp09	figs-explicit	τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν	1	the obedience of all of you	Here, the Corinthians’ **obedience** could be directed toward: (1) Paul and those with him, including Titus. Alternate translation: “the obedience of all of you to us” (2) just Titus. Alternate translation: “the obedience of all of you to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	15	d87j	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν	1	the obedience of all of you	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **obedience**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how all of you obeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	15	uagc	figs-explicit	μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου	1	the obedience of all of you	Here the Corinthians’ **fear** could be directed toward: (1) Titus as Paul’s representative. Alternate translation: “with fear and trembling with respect to him” (2) the consequences of what had happened. Alternate translation: “with fear and trembling because of what had happened” (3) God, whom Titus represented. Alternate translation: “with and trembling with respect to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	7	15	dtni	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου	1	the obedience of all of you	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **fear** and **trembling**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as you feared and trembled” or “fearfully and nervously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	7	15	g9bz	figs-doublet	φόβου καὶ τρόμου	1	you welcomed him with fear and trembling	The terms **fear** and **trembling** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “great fear” or “deep respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2CO	7	16	hr3w	figs-explicit	θαρρῶ ἐν ὑμῖν	1	you welcomed him with fear and trembling	The implication is that Paul is **confident** that the Corinthians are doing what is right or proper. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am confident that you do what is proper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	intro	kl7m			0		# 2 Corinthians 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>6. Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15)<br>      * Example of the Macedonians (8:1–6)<br>      * Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5)<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation from [Exodus 16:18](../exo/16/18.md) in [8:15](../08/15.md).<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The collection for the church in Jerusalem<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul encourages the Corinthians to finish collecting the money they were going to contribute to what Paul was gathering to send to the believers in Jerusalem. Paul sometimes calls participating in this collection a “grace.” He often refers to this collection indirectly, which was a polite way to talk about financial matters in his culture. If people in your culture speaks more directly about financial matters, you may need to make some of the ideas more explicit. In order to encourage the Corinthians to give to this collection, Paul tells them that the Macedonian believers have already given generously ([8:1–5](../08/01.md)), states reasons why the Corinthians should give ([8:6–15](../08/06.md)), and assures the Corinthians that the people who are managing the collection are trustworthy ([8:16–24](../08/16.md)). Make sure that your translation includes these elements that encourage the Corinthians to give to the collection.<br><br>### The generosity of the Macedonians<br><br>In [8:1–5](../08/01.md), Paul tells the Corinthians about how the Macedonian believers contributed generously to the collection even though they were poor and suffering. He does this to encourage the Corinthians also to give generously. While Paul does not directly compare how much the Corinthians and Macedonians have given, he does use the Macedonians as an example. Your translation should clearly present the Macedonians as an example to imitate.<br><br>### Equality<br><br>In [8:13–14](../08/13.md), Paul indicates that one of the reasons for the collection is “equality” among believers. He does not mean that every believer must have exactly the same amount of possessions and money. What he does mean is that believers who have much should share with believers who have little. He wants all believers to be doing “equally” well. So, while this does not mean that everyone has exactly the same amount of possessions and money, it does mean that some believers should not be rich when others are poor. Consider how you might express the idea of general, although not exact, “equality.”<br><br>### Titus and two traveling companions<br><br>In [8:16–23](../08/16.md), Paul commends Titus and then introduces and commends the two men who travel with him. Most likely, these three men traveled together and carried Paul’s letter (2 Corinthians) with them. Paul does not name the two men, but he does indicate that they are trustworthy and should be respected. If you have normal ways of introducing and commending people, you could use them here. <br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Exclusive “we”<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians. You should assume that Paul only means himself and those with him unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	8	1	mm8g	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **Now** introduces a new topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	8	1	d3pn	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	Connecting Statement:	Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fellow Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	8	1	a73v	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	Connecting Statement:	Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	8	1	nqwf	figs-possession	τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that comes from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a form that makes it clear. Alternate translation: “the grace from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	8	1	phws	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Connecting Statement:	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gift of God” or “what comes graciously from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	1	d1mj	figs-activepassive	τὴν δεδομένην	1	the grace of God that has been given to the churches of Macedonia	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “that he has given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	8	1	xnfz	figs-explicit	τῆς Μακεδονίας	1	the grace of God that has been given to the churches of Macedonia	As Paul indicates in [7:5](../07/05.md), he is in **Macedonia** when he writes this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this place was Paul’s location when he wrote the letter. Alternate translation: “of Macedonia, where I am currently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	2	zjd7		ὅτι	1	the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity	(1) further explain or define the “grace of God” in [8:1](../08/01.md). (2) support or give a reason for what Paul said in [8:1](../08/01.md).
2CO	8	2	usu2	figs-possession	πολλῇ δοκιμῇ θλίψεως	1	the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity	Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **severe trial** that is made up of or characterized by **affliction**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a severe trial that afflicted them” or “affliction, which was a severe trial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	8	2	b7k5	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν καὶ ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν	1	the abundance of their joy	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abundance**, **joy**, and **poverty**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how very joyful they were and how deeply poor they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	2	a6td	figs-metaphor	ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν	1	the abundance of their joy	Here Paul is speaking of **poverty** as if it were a **deep** hole. He means that they were very poor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their extreme poverty” or “their great poverty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	8	2	pr8c	figs-metaphor	τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν	1	their deep poverty … the riches of their generosity	Here Paul is speaking of **generosity** as if it were **riches**. He means that these people had very much **generosity**, just like a “rich” person has very much money. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the greatness of their generosity” or “how much generosity they had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	8	2	z6mt	figs-possession	τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν	1	the riches of their generosity	Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe **riches** that could: (1) indicate how much **generosity** these people had. Alternate translation: “their rich generosity” (2) be made up of **generosity**. Alternate translation: “the riches that are their generosity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	8	2	hcgh	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν	1	the riches of their generosity	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **generosity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how richly generous they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	3	muo6	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	the riches of their generosity	Here, the word **For** introduces a support for what Paul said in the previous verse ([8:2](../08/02.md)) about the “riches of their generosity.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	8	3	tf8b	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ δύναμιν & παρὰ δύναμιν	1	the riches of their generosity	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ability**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they gave according to what they were able to give … beyond what they were able to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	3	wxoh	figs-idiom	αὐθαίρετοι	1	the riches of their generosity	Here, the phrase **of their own accord** indicates that no one forced or required the believers in Macedonia to act as they did. Rather, they chose to do so on their own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “of their own free will” or “because they wanted to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	8	3	soq9	figs-infostructure	αὐθαίρετοι	1	the riches of their generosity	Here, the phrase **of their own accord** could modify: (1) the implied **gave** in this verse. Alternate translation: “which they did of their own accord” (2) “pleaded” in the following verse ([8:4](../08/04.md)). If you use the following alternate translate, you will need to remove the comma at the end of this verse. Alternate translation: “and that of their own accord and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	8	4	tfsj	figs-abstractnouns	δεόμενοι ἡμῶν, τὴν χάριν καὶ τὴν κοινωνίαν τῆς διακονίας τῆς	1	this ministry to the saints	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **favor**, **fellowship**, and **ministry**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they pleaded with us to favor them and allow them to take part in ministering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	4	jdqw	figs-hendiadys	τὴν χάριν καὶ τὴν κοινωνίαν	1	this ministry to the saints	The two words **favor** and **fellowship** work together to express a single idea. The word **fellowship** describes what **the favor** is. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a different way. Alternate translation: “the favor of the fellowship” or “the gift of fellowship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2CO	8	4	nmw8	figs-explicit	τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους	1	this ministry to the saints	Here Paul does not give very many details about the **ministry** because he had already told the Corinthians about it in [1 Corinthians 16:1–4](../1co/16/01.md). From that passage and other passages, we know that Paul was collecting money from various churches to send to Jerusalem to help the believers there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that this is what Paul is talking about. Alternate translation: “of this ministry that is for the saints in Jerusalem” or “of this ministry of sending money to the Jerusalem saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	5	y9sj	figs-explicit	οὐ καθὼς ἠλπίσαμεν, ἀλλ’	1	this ministry to the saints	Here Paul is implying that the Macedonians did more than Paul and those with him had **hoped**, not that they did less. If this clause would imply that the Macedonians did less, you could use a form that implies that they did more. Alternate translation: “while we had hoped for something, they did more:” or “doing more than we had hoped,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	5	t73o	figs-metaphor	ἑαυτοὺς ἔδωκαν, πρῶτον	1	this ministry to the saints	Here Paul speaks as if the Macedonians were gifts that they themselves **gave** to **the Lord** and to **us**. He means that the Macedonians chose to completely serve and honor **the Lord** and **us**. If it would be helpful in your language, you express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they first devoted themselves” or “they chose first to be servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	8	5	w0el		πρῶτον & καὶ	1	this ministry to the saints	Here, the words **first** and **then** could indicate what is: (1) more and less important. Alternate translation: “primarily … and secondarily” (2) first and second in sequence. Alternate translation: “first … and second”
2CO	8	5	k4pa		καὶ ἡμῖν	1	this ministry to the saints	Here, the phrase **and then** could introduce: (1) what comes after what they **first** did. Alternate translation: “and after that to us” (2) the second part of what they **first** did. Paul implies that what comes after what they **first** did is giving money. Alternate translation: “and to us before they gave money”
2CO	8	5	m2mg	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἡμῖν	1	this ministry to the saints	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and then they gave themselves to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	8	5	kq0n	figs-infostructure	ἑαυτοὺς ἔδωκαν, πρῶτον τῷ Κυρίῳ, καὶ ἡμῖν, διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ	1	this ministry to the saints	Here, the phrase **by the will of God** could modify: (1) how the Corinthians both gave themselves to **the Lord** and to **us**. Alternate translation: “by the will of God they first gave themselves to the Lord and then to us” (2) just how the Corinthians gave themselves to **us**. Alternate translation: “they first gave themselves to the Lord and then, by the will of God, to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	8	5	kphi	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ	1	this ministry to the saints	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **will**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as God wanted” or “which is what God desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	6	z42y	figs-explicit	καθὼς προενήρξατο	1	he had already begun this task	Here Paul could be implying that Titus already **began**: (1) the **grace**, which is collecting money for the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “just as he began this grace” (2) to work for the sake of the Corinthians in general. Alternate translation: “just as he began to serve you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	6	vn4u	figs-explicit	καὶ τὴν χάριν ταύτην	1	he would complete among you this act of grace	Here, the word **grace** refers to what it did in [8:4](../08/04.md): being able to contribute money to what Paul was collecting for believers in Jerusalem. If possible, translate it as you did in [8:4](../08/04.md). Alternate translation: “this gift as well” or “this gracious act of giving as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	6	i4jd	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ τὴν χάριν ταύτην	1	he would complete among you this act of grace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what you also are graciously contributing” or “what you also are giving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	7	x7cd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀλλ’	1	you should abound in this act of grace	Here, the word **But** introduces a new section. It is does not primarily contrast with what Paul has already said, although it does introduce a change in focus from the Macedonians and Titus to the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new a section or a change in focus. Alternate translation: “Now” or “In your case,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	8	7	mv4w	figs-hyperbole	ἐν παντὶ	1	you should abound in this act of grace	Paul says **everything** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in so many things” or “in very many ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2CO	8	7	iu8n	figs-abstractnouns	πίστει, καὶ λόγῳ, καὶ γνώσει, καὶ πάσῃ σπουδῇ, καὶ τῇ ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν ἀγάπῃ	1	you should abound in this act of grace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, **speech**, **knowledge**, **earnestness**, and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that is, you are faithful, proper in what you speak, knowledgable about many things, very earnest, and full of how we have loved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	7	hy1o	translate-textvariants	ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν	1	you should abound in this act of grace	Many ancient manuscripts read **from us in you**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “from you in us.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2CO	8	7	zhg5		ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν	1	you should abound in this act of grace	Here, the phrase **from us in you** could indicate that: (1) the **love** is how Paul and those with him feel about the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “that we have for you” (2) Paul and those with him enabled or caused the Corinthians to have **love**. Alternate translation: “that came from us and is now in you”
2CO	8	7	gqz3	figs-explicit	ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι	1	you should abound in this act of grace	Here, the word **grace** refers to what it did in [8:4](../08/04.md), [6](../08/06.md): being able to contribute money to what Paul was collecting for believers in Jerusalem. If possible, translate it as you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “in this gift” or “in this gracious act of giving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	7	fpe1	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι	1	you should abound in this act of grace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in what you are graciously contributing” or “in what you are giving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	8	mc1z	writing-pronouns	λέγω	1	to test … through the diligence of others	The pronoun **this** refers to what Paul said in the previous verse about how the Corinthians “should abound in this act of grace” ([8:7](../08/07.md)). If this is not clear for your readers, you could more clearly refer to that exhortation. Alternate translation: “I say what I just did” or “I say that you should abound in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	8	8	up6m	figs-abstractnouns	κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν	1	to test … through the diligence of others	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **command**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to command you” or “in a commanding way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	8	xgi5	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς ἑτέρων σπουδῆς&τὸ τῆς ὑμετέρας ἀγάπης γνήσιον	1	to test … through the diligence of others	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **genuineness**, **love**, and **earnestness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that how you love others is genuine through how earnest others are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	8	wn2k	figs-explicit	διὰ τῆς ἑτέρων σπουδῆς	1	to test … through the diligence of others	Here, the phrase **through the earnestness of others** indicates the standard by which Paul is **proving** the **love** of the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the standard by which something else is proved or tested. Alternate translation: “in comparison with the earnestness of others” or “against the earnestness of others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	8	x7fs	figs-nominaladj	ἑτέρων	1	to test … through the diligence of others	Paul is using the adjective **others** as a noun to mean other people, particularly other believers. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2CO	8	9	irzk	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	the grace of our Lord	Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Corinthians should give money to help fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “That is because,” or “Now you should abound in giving because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	8	9	c1ch	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν χάριν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the grace of our Lord	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gift of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “what our Lord Jesus Christ has graciously done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	9	iz6z	figs-metaphor	δι’ ὑμᾶς ἐπτώχευσεν, πλούσιος ὤν, ἵνα ὑμεῖς τῇ ἐκείνου πτωχείᾳ πλουτήσητε	1	though he was rich, for your sakes he became poor	Here, Paul is speaking of what God considers valuable, including blessings, power, and honor, as if it were wealth. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or plain language. Alternate translation: “he became like a poor person for your sake, though he was like a rich person, so that by what was like that one’s poverty, you might become like rich people” or “he gave up blessings and honor for your sake, though he had great blessings and honor, so that by giving those things up, you might receive blessings and honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	8	9	j5ym	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ ἐκείνου πτωχείᾳ	1	through his poverty you might become rich	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **poverty**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by that one being poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	10	ymz5	figs-abstractnouns	γνώμην ἐν&δίδωμι	1	In this matter	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **opinion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I offer you how I think about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	10	b7ht	writing-pronouns	ἐν τούτῳ	1	In this matter	Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) the issue that Paul is speaking about, which is the Corinthians collecting money for believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “about this grace of giving” or “about collecting money” (2) what Paul is about to say. Alternate translation: “in what follows” or “in what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	8	10	azlo	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	In this matter	Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) the Corinthians hearing Paul’s **opinion**. Alternate translation: “listening my opinion” (2) how Paul is giving an **opinion** instead of a command. Alternate translation: “an opinion instead of a command” (3) giving money. Alternate translation: “the act of giving” or “collecting money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	8	10	z8kg	figs-distinguish	ὑμῖν&οἵτινες	1	In this matter	Here, the word **who** could introduce: (1) further information about what the Corinthians were doing. In this case, it describes the Corinthians instead of distinguishing them from other people. Alternate translation: “for you, who” (2) what kind of people the Corinthians are. In this case, it distinguishes the Corinthians from other people and describes them as the kind of people for whom **this is profitable**. Alternate translation: “for you, you who” or “for you since you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2CO	8	10	spzy	figs-infostructure	οὐ μόνον τὸ ποιῆσαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ θέλειν, προενήρξασθε ἀπὸ πέρυσι	1	In this matter	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Paul is emphasizing **desire**, so consider a natural way to emphasis this part of the sentence. Alternate translation: “certainly desired to begin to do this and did not just begin to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	8	10	mt5f	figs-explicit	τὸ ποιῆσαι&τὸ θέλειν	1	In this matter	In these phrases, Paul is speaking about collecting money for the believers in Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to collect money for the Jerusalem believers … to do desire to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	11	himo	grammar-connect-words-phrases	νυνὶ δὲ	1	there was the readiness of your desire	Here, the phrase **But now** introduces an exhortation for what to do in the present time as opposed to what they already did “a year ago” (see [8:10](../08/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that transitions from the past to the present. Alternate translation: “So at this present time,” or “At this time,“ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	8	11	fc27	figs-abstractnouns	καθάπερ ἡ προθυμία τοῦ θέλειν	1	there was the readiness of your desire	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **readiness** and **desire**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “just you were ready and willing to do it” or “just as you were eager and wanted to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	11	d6ly	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι	1	there may be the completion	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **completion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “also you may complete it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	11	rgl0	figs-explicit	ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν	1	there may be the completion	Here, the phrase **from what you have** indicates that Paul wants the Corinthians to give some of the things or money that they own. He does not want them to borrow money or give everything that they own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this idea explicit. Alternate translation: “from what you are able” or “with you giving what you can afford” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	12	c50n	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	according to whatever a person has	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([8:11](../08/11.md)) about giving “from what you have.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “I say that you should give from what you because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	8	12	tgch	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ	1	according to whatever a person has	Paul uses the word **if** to indicate that this is a hypothetical condition. In other words, what people give will only be **acceptable** if **the readiness is already there**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing one thing that is a requirement for another thing. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
2CO	8	12	mx7f	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ προθυμία πρόκειται	1	according to whatever a person has	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **readiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “someone is ready” or “a person is already eager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	12	c2zc	figs-explicit	καθὸ&εὐπρόσδεκτος	1	according to whatever a person has	Here Paul does not state what is **fully acceptable**. He implies that it is whatever they give that is **fully acceptable**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is fully acceptable to give” or “whatever one gives is fully acceptable according to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	12	k9wh	figs-gendernotations	οὐκ ἔχει	1	according to whatever a person has	Although the word **he** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “what one does not have” or “what he or she does not have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	8	13	mp6k	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὐ γὰρ	1	For this	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([8:13](../08/13.md)) giving “according to whatever one might have.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “As you can see, I want you to give not” or “I say that because my goal is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	8	13	iyop	figs-ellipsis	οὐ	1	For this	Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Paul implies that he is speaking about the goal or purpose of giving to other believers. The ULT supplies very general words here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use more specific words. Alternate translation: “I do not want you to give” or “we give to fellow believers not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	8	13	smk2	figs-infostructure	οὐ&ἵνα ἄλλοις ἄνεσις, ὑμῖν θλῖψις, ἀλλ’ ἐξ ἰσότητος	1	for the ease of others, and your affliction	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “this is out of equality, not so that there is relief for others but tribulation for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	8	13	zht9	figs-abstractnouns	ἄλλοις ἄνεσις, ὑμῖν θλῖψις	1	for the ease of others, and your affliction	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **relief** and **tribulation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “others are relieved but you are troubled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	13	y6xj	figs-infostructure	ὑμῖν&ἀλλ’ ἐξ ἰσότητος	1	for the ease of others, and your affliction	Here, the phrase **but out of equality** could: (1) contrast with what Paul has said in this verse about some having **relief** and others having **tribulation**. Alternate translation: “for you, but so that there is equality” (2) introduce what Paul says in the following verse about believers sharing “abundance.” If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the capital letter at the beginning of the following verse. Alternate translation: “for you. Rather, out of equality,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2CO	8	13	no45	figs-explicit	ἐξ ἰσότητος	1	for the ease of others, and your affliction	Here, the phrase **out of equality** could provide: (1) the basis or principle for giving and sharing. Alternate translation: “because the goal is equality” or “from the principle of equality” (2) the desired result from giving and sharing. Alternate translation: “so that everyone is equal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	13	ktd1	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἰσότητος	1	for the sake of equality	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **equality**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “focusing on everyone being equal” or “we are trying to make everyone equal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	14	um8e	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ, τὸ ὑμῶν περίσσευμα εἰς τὸ ἐκείνων ὑστέρημα, ἵνα καὶ τὸ ἐκείνων περίσσευμα γένηται εἰς τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα	1	This is also so that their abundance may supply your need	Here, the phrase **At the present time** could refer to: (1) how things were when Paul wrote this letter. In this case, Paul is telling the Corinthians that they have more than the Jerusalem believers do, and so they should help. In the future, if the Jerusalem believers have more than the Corinthians, they will help the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “At this time, your abundance of money is for the lack of those ones, so that also the abundance of money of those ones may be for your need in the future” (2) the time between Christ’s first and second comings. In this case, Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should help the Jerusalem believers financially, and the Jerusalem believers will help them spiritually. Alternate translation: “In this new age, your abundance of money is for the lack of those ones, so that also the spiritual abundance of those ones may be for your need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	14	uqyp	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ὑμῶν περίσσευμα εἰς τὸ ἐκείνων ὑστέρημα	1	This is also so that their abundance may supply your need	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abundance** and **lack**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what you abundantly possess is for what those ones lack” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	14	jkwe	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ἐκείνων περίσσευμα γένηται εἰς τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα	1	This is also so that their abundance may supply your need	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abundance** and **need**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what those ones abundantly possess may be for what you need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	14	om8r	figs-abstractnouns	γένηται ἰσότης	1	This is also so that their abundance may supply your need	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **equality**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “everyone is equal” or “everyone does equally well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	15	xpr7	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	as it is written	Here Paul quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Exodus 16:18](../exo/16/18.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way, or you could include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” or “just as you can read in Exodus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2CO	8	15	ue8w	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1	as it is written	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the person who wrote the book of Exodus. Alternate translation: “someone wrote in Exodus” or “it says in Exodus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	8	15	db2r	figs-quotations	γέγραπται, ὁ τὸ πολὺ, οὐκ ἐπλεόνασεν; καὶ ὁ τὸ ὀλίγον, οὐκ ἠλαττόνησεν	1	as it is written	It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “it is written that the one who gathered much did not have too much, and the one who gathered little did not have too little.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2CO	8	15	u28y	figs-explicit	ὁ τὸ πολὺ, οὐκ ἐπλεόνασεν; καὶ ὁ τὸ ὀλίγον, οὐκ ἠλαττόνησεν	1	did not have too little	Here Paul is quoting from a story about how God led the Israelites through the desert. They did not have much food, so God miraculously made something like bread appear on the ground for them. The Israelites called the food “Manna,” and God commanded each of them to gather a specific amount for each person. This amount was just right, which is what this quotation describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some of this information in your translation or a in a footnote. Alternate translation: “Any Israelite who gathered much Manna did not have too much, and any Israelite who gathered little Manna did not have too little” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	15	ahrp	figs-genericnoun	ὁ τὸ	-1	did not have too little	The phrase **the one** represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “Those … those” or “Everyone … everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2CO	8	16	w40p	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	same earnest care	Here, the word **But** introduces a new section. Paul is again speaking about **Titus**, whom he last mentioned in [8:6](../08/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	8	16	w8zo	figs-exclamations	χάρις&τῷ Θεῷ	1	same earnest care	Here, **thanks {be} to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “we give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2CO	8	16	dgpj	figs-distinguish	τῷ διδόντι	1	same earnest care	Here Paul adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who has placed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2CO	8	16	duy8	figs-metaphor	τῷ διδόντι τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου	1	same earnest care	Here, Paul is speaking as if **earnestness** were an object that **God** could put **into the heart of Titus**. He means that God made **the heart of Titus** earnest. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one making the same earnestness on your behalf characterize the heart of Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	8	16	yhr2	figs-explicit	τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν	1	same earnest care	Here, the word **same** indicates that the **earnestness** that Titus has is the same **earnestness** that Paul and those with him have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same earnestness that we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	16	vsm3	figs-abstractnouns	διδόντι τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου	1	same earnest care	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **earnest**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making the heart of Titus earnest on your behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	16	cr18	figs-metonymy	τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου	1	who put into Titus’ heart the same earnest care that I have for you	In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “the mind of Titus” or “what Titus wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	8	17	d9he	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1	For he not only accepted our appeal	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of one way in which Titus showed the “earnestness” that Paul referred to in the previous verse ([8:16](../08/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or basis for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “For example,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	8	17	e4xn	figs-explicit	τὴν&παράκλησιν	1	For he not only accepted our appeal	Here Paul implies that the **appeal** was for Titus to visit the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “our appeal that he visit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	17	g404	figs-go	ἐξῆλθεν	1	For he not only accepted our appeal	Most likely, Titus and those who traveled with him took this letter to the Corinthians. In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “he has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2CO	8	17	jlyp	figs-pastforfuture	ἐξῆλθεν	1	For he not only accepted our appeal	Most likely, Titus and those who traveled with him took this letter from Paul to the Corinthians. Use whatever tense is most natural for referring to this action. Alternate translation: “he is going” or “he went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2CO	8	17	dlo1	figs-idiom	αὐθαίρετος	1	For he not only accepted our appeal	Here, the phrase **of his own accord** indicates that no one forced or required Titus to act as he did. Rather, they he to do so on their own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. See you how translated the similar phrase in [8:3](../08/03.md). Alternate translation: “of his own free will” or “because he wanted to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	8	18	txld	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	with him	Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Also,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	8	18	crw1	figs-pastforfuture	συνεπέμψαμεν	1	with him	Here Paul refers to how he and those with him sent another believer along with Titus. Use the same tense that you used in the previous verse for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “we are sending together” or “we sent together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2CO	8	18	rje2	figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀδελφὸν	1	with him	Paul is using the term **brother** to mean a person who shares the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	8	18	jll9	figs-abstractnouns	οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος&διὰ πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν	1	the brother who is praised among all of the churches	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **praise**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who is praised throughout all of the churches” or “whom people from all of the churches praise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	18	nd28	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ	1	the brother who is praised among all of the churches	Here, the phrase **in the gospel** describes generally in what area this **brother** is praised. Paul means that this **brother** acts to spread the gospel. This probably includes preaching the good news, but it probably also includes many other acts of service, including visiting believers and collecting money for other believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for his service to the gospel” or “for spreading the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	19	j9rk	figs-explicit	οὐ μόνον&ἀλλὰ	1	Not only this	Here, the phrase **not only this** refers to how this “brother” received praise from all the churches. Paul uses this phrase to introduce something he thinks is even more important about this “brother.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something even more important. Alternate translation: “even more,” or “more importantly,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	19	c667	figs-activepassive	καὶ χειροτονηθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν	1	he also was selected by the churches	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “also the churches chose him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	8	19	q5on	figs-explicit	σὺν	1	he also was selected by the churches	Here, the phrase **along with** indicates what the person **was chosen** to help with. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that he could help with” or “with the intent that he could assist in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	19	pgtn	figs-explicit	τῇ χάριτι ταύτῃ	1	he also was selected by the churches	Here, the word **grace** refers to what it did in [8:6–7](../08/06.md): being able to contribute money to what Paul was collecting for believers in Jerusalem. If possible, translate it as you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “this gift” or “this gracious act of giving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	19	mkwm	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ χάριτι ταύτῃ	1	he also was selected by the churches	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gift” or “what people are graciously giving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	19	k7dy	figs-activepassive	τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν	1	along with this act of grace which is being administered by us	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we are administering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	8	19	iph0	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου δόξαν	1	along with this act of grace which is being administered by us	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to glorify the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	19	lvyu	figs-explicit	προθυμίαν ἡμῶν	1	along with this act of grace which is being administered by us	Here Paul implies that they have **readiness** to help fellow believers, particularly the fellow believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “our readiness to help others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	19	v22x	figs-abstractnouns	προθυμίαν ἡμῶν	1	our readiness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **readiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how ready we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	20	tfv0		στελλόμενοι	1	concerning this generosity that we are carrying out	Here, the word **avoiding** introduces Paul’s reason for including this fellow believer in the process of collecting and distributing money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase here that introduces a reason for doing something. Alternate translation: “we included him to avoid” or “our goal was to avoid”
2CO	8	20	o27q	figs-extrainfo	τοῦτο, μή τις	1	concerning this generosity that we are carrying out	Here Paul introduces what he and those with him wish to avoid by using the word **this**, and then he states what it is that they do not want to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that identifies what Paul wishes to avoid. Alternate translation: “how someone” or “any possibility that a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2CO	8	20	a3ps	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ἁδρότητι ταύτῃ τῇ διακονουμένῃ	1	concerning this generosity that we are carrying out	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **generosity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “concerning what people generously offered that is being administered” or “concerning the generous gift being administered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	20	mbm3	figs-explicit	τῇ ἁδρότητι ταύτῃ	1	concerning this generosity that we are carrying out	Here, the word **generosity** refers to the large sum of money that Paul has collected and plans to give to the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “this large sum of money” or “this generous sharing with the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	20	a7xv	figs-activepassive	τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν	1	concerning this generosity that we are carrying out	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we are administering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	8	21	n4x1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For we considered beforehand what is right	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([8:20](../08/20.md)) about avoiding blame from others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	8	21	ey5n	figs-metaphor	καλὰ, οὐ μόνον ἐνώπιον Κυρίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐνώπιον ἀνθρώπων	1	before the Lord … before people	Here Paul speaks as if **{what is} good** were in front of or **before** both **the Lord** and **men**. He means that he cares about both what **men** and **the Lord** think is **good**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “not only what is good in the Lord’s eyes, but also what is good in men’s eyes” or “not only what the Lord considers to be proper, but also what men consider to be proper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	8	21	fitv	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	before the Lord … before people	Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	8	22	mdcs	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	with them	Here, the word **Now** introduces a new idea, which is that Paul is sending one more person with Titus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new idea, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	8	22	j5jt	figs-pastforfuture	συνεπέμψαμεν	1	with them	Here Paul refers to how he and those with him sent yet another believer along with Titus. Use the same tense that you used in [8:17](../08/17.md) for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “we are sending” or “we have sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2CO	8	22	ax5x	figs-metaphor	τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν	1	with them	Paul is using the term **brother** to refer to a person who shares the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “another believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	8	22	d3yj	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	with them	Here, the word **them** refers to Titus and the previously mentioned brother. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun refers. Alternate translation: “with these two men” or “with Titus and the other brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	8	22	qqcs	figs-explicit	ὃν ἐδοκιμάσαμεν	1	with them	Here, the phrase **whom we proved** could indicate that Paul and those with him have: (1) tested the **brother**, and he successfully passed the tests. Alternate translation: “whom we proved by testing” or “whom we tested and approved” (2) seen what the **brother** does, and they approve of him. Alternate translation: “whom we are sure about” or “of whom we approve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	22	bay7	figs-explicit	πολλοῖς, πολλάκις σπουδαῖον ὄντα	1	with them	Here, the phrase **often being eager** identifies what this **brother** was **proved** to be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “many ways to often be eager” or “in many ways that he was often eager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	22	l5yd	figs-explicit	πολὺ σπουδαιότερον	1	with them	Here Paul implies that the **brother** is **even more eager** than he was when Paul and those with him **proved** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is even more eager than he was before” or “he is more eager than ever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	22	cusu	figs-abstractnouns	πεποιθήσει πολλῇ τῇ εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	with them	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confidence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how very confident he is in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	22	iw9e	figs-explicit	πεποιθήσει πολλῇ τῇ εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	with them	Here Paul implies that the **brother** has **confidence** that the Corinthians will do what is right, particularly that they will give generously to help the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because of his great confidence that you will give generously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	23	dbgj	figs-doublet	κοινωνὸς ἐμὸς καὶ εἰς ὑμᾶς συνεργός	1	he is my partner and fellow worker for you	The terms **partner** and **fellow worker** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he is my partner in working for you” or “he is my fellow worker for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2CO	8	23	mmi2	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν	1	he is my partner and fellow worker for you	Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our fellow believers” or “those believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	8	23	lat3	figs-explicit	ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν	1	As for our brothers	Here, the phrase **our brothers** refers to the two other men who will accompany Titus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “our two brothers” or “the brother we mentioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	23	u8lx	figs-possession	ἀπόστολοι ἐκκλησιῶν	1	they are sent by the churches	Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **messengers** who were sent by **the churches**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “they are messengers sent by the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	8	23	sams	figs-explicit	δόξα Χριστοῦ	1	an honor to Christ	Here, the phrase **a glory of Christ** describes the **brothers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this clearer. Alternate translation: “and they are a glory of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	8	23	re88	figs-possession	δόξα Χριστοῦ	1	an honor to Christ	Here Paul uses the possessive to describe **glory** that belongs to **Christ**. He could mean more specifically that: (1) the brothers give **glory** to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “and they glorify Christ” (2) what the brothers do shows the **glory** that **Christ** has. Alternate translation: “and they show how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2CO	8	23	a8v2	figs-abstractnouns	δόξα Χριστοῦ	1	an honor to Christ	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “glorifying Christ” or “who show that Christ is glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	8	24	wpzy	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	an honor to Christ	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an exhortation based on what Paul has said in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces this kind of exhortation. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “Since that is who they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	8	24	wk4y	figs-extrainfo	τὴν&ἔνδειξιν τῆς ἀγάπης ὑμῶν, καὶ ἡμῶν καυχήσεως ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1	an honor to Christ	Here Paul wants the Corinthians to **prove** the **proof**. If this form is redundant in your language, you could express the idea without using the word **proof**. Alternate translation: “that your love is real and that our boasting about you is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2CO	8	24	lr1f	figs-metaphor	εἰς πρόσωπον τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν	1	an honor to Christ	He Paul speaks as if the **proof** was directly in front of the **faces of the churches**. What he means is that the **proof** is something that the **churches** can see and know about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in the sight of the churches” or “with the knowledge of the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	8	24	oc83	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν&ἔνδειξιν τῆς ἀγάπης ὑμῶν, καὶ ἡμῶν καυχήσεως ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1	an honor to Christ	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **proof** and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that you do love others and what we boasted about you is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	9	intro	lt8d			0		# 2 Corinthians 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 9, which is quoted from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>Paul uses three agricultural metaphors. He uses them to teach about giving to needy believers. The metaphors help Paul explain that God will reward those who give generously. Paul does not say how or when God will reward them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])
2CO	9	1	wc5l	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation concerning why Paul and those with him boast about the Corinthians (see [8:24](../08/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	9	1	fxs3	figs-explicit	τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους	1	the ministry that is for the saints	Here Paul is referring specifically to the **ministry** of collecting and giving money to the **saints** in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is referring to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the ministry that is to the saints in Jerusalem” or “the money that we are collecting for the Jerusalem saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	1	kpvg	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς	1	the ministry that is for the saints	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ministry**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how we minister to” or “what we are doing for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	9	1	wcuz		περισσόν μοί ἐστιν τὸ γράφειν ὑμῖν	1	the ministry that is for the saints	Alternate translation: “it is really not necessary for me to write to you”
2CO	9	2	o55j	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	General Information:	Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why it is “excessive” for Paul to write to the Corinthians about the collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “It is excessive since” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	9	2	yt00	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν προθυμίαν ὑμῶν	1	General Information:	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **readiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how ready you are” or “that you are ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	9	2	e62g	figs-explicit	τὴν προθυμίαν ὑμῶν&παρεσκεύασται&ἠρέθισε τοὺς πλείονας	1	Achaia has been ready	Paul never directly states what the Corinthians and the Macedonians are ready or about to do. He implies that it is to give to the collection for the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “your readiness to help fellow believers … has been ready to help … stirred up most of them to help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	2	jqee	figs-quotations	ὅτι Ἀχαΐα παρεσκεύασται ἀπὸ πέρυσι, καὶ	1	General Information:	It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘Achaia has been ready since last year,’ and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2CO	9	2	rd2g	translate-names	Ἀχαΐα	1	General Information:	**Achaia** is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. The city of Corinth was in this province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2CO	9	2	i529	figs-metonymy	Ἀχαΐα παρεσκεύασται	1	Achaia has been ready	Here, the word **Achaia** refers to the believers who live in this province. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the people directly instead of just to the place. Alternate translation: “the Christians in Achaia have been ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	9	2	zdgk	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ ὑμῶν ζῆλος	1	Achaia has been ready	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **zeal**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how zealous you are” or “how you have acted zealously has” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	9	2	ynu8	figs-metaphor	ἠρέθισε τοὺς πλείονας	1	Achaia has been ready	Here Paul speaks as if the **zeal** of the Corinthians could stir up or provoke the believers in Macedonia. He means that the Corinthians’ **zeal** encourages or motivates the Macedonians to act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “challenged most of them” or “motivated most of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	9	3	x7t9	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	the brothers	Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast a with what Paul has said in [9:1–2](../09/01.md) about how eager the Corinthians are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” or “Despite that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	9	3	vdla	figs-pastforfuture	ἔπεμψα	1	the brothers	Here Paul refers to how he sent the two believers and Titus when he sent this letter. Use the same tense that you used in [8:17](../08/17.md) for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “I am sending” or “I have sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2CO	9	3	r5pp	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἀδελφούς	1	the brothers	Here, the word **brothers** refers to Titus and the two fellow believers who travel with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “these brothers” or “the three brothers I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	3	lcx8	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφούς	1	the brothers	Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” or “the Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	9	3	k1er	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ μέρει τούτῳ	1	our boasting about you may not be futile	Here, the phrase **this matter** identifies the topic that Paul is speaking about: giving to the collection for the Jerusalem believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in this matter of giving to the Jerusalem believers” or “in this matter of contributing to the collection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	3	d69o	figs-explicit	παρεσκευασμένοι ἦτε	1	our boasting about you may not be futile	Here Paul implies that he wants them to **be ready** to give to the collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you might be ready to contribute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	3	tdw5	figs-explicit	καθὼς ἔλεγον	1	our boasting about you may not be futile	Here, the phrase **I was saying** refers back to what Paul wrote in [9:2](../09/02.md) about how he tells the Macedonian believers that the Corinthians have been prepared to give since the previous year. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as I was saying to the Macedonians” or “as I was saying that you were ready since last year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	4	iwg7	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	μή πως	1	find you unprepared	Here, the word **Otherwise** introduces a possible situation in which the Corinthians would be **unprepared** in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse about them being “ready.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrasting situation. Alternate translation: “However” or “But if that did not happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2CO	9	4	dov9	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν ἔλθωσιν σὺν ἐμοὶ Μακεδόνες, καὶ εὕρωσιν ὑμᾶς ἀπαρασκευάστους	1	find you unprepared	Here Paul introduces something that could happen when Paul visits them. There are two things that Paul thinks are possibilities. First, **Macedonians** might travel with him. Second, the Corinthians might be **unprepared**. Paul wishes to say that if both these things were to happen, both he and the Corinthians would be **ashamed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that might happen. Alternate translation: “suppose that Macedonians come with and find you unprepared; in that case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
2CO	9	4	j8ey	figs-explicit	ἀπαρασκευάστους	1	find you unprepared	Here Paul implies that they would be **unprepared** to give money to the collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate: “unprepared to contribute” or “unprepared to give generously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	4	dy3x	figs-activepassive	καταισχυνθῶμεν ἡμεῖς, ἵνα μὴ λέγωμεν ὑμεῖς, ἐν τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ	1	find you unprepared	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this situation would shame us—not to mention you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	9	4	wyzr	figs-idiom	καταισχυνθῶμεν ἡμεῖς, ἵνα μὴ λέγωμεν ὑμεῖς, ἐν	1	find you unprepared	Here, the phrase **not to mention you** indicates that Paul thinks that the Corinthians would obviously be **ashamed**, even more than Paul and those with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that expresses that idea. Alternate translation: “we, and most surely you, would be ashamed by” or “we—to say nothing of you—would be ashamed by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	9	4	vhme	figs-explicit	τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ	1	find you unprepared	Here, the phrase **this situation** could refer to: (1) what would actually happen if the Corinthians were **unprepared** in contrast to what Paul had told the Macedonians would happen. Alternate translation: “what would actually be true” or “what had happened” (2) how sure Paul had been that the Corinthians would be ready. Alternate translation: “how confident we were” or “this confidence” (3) the project that Paul was undertaking, which was the collection of money for the Jerusalem believers. Alternate translation: “our project” or “what we were planning to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	4	rz1f	translate-textvariants	τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ	1	find you unprepared	Here most ancient manuscripts read **this situation**. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts read “this situation of boasting.” Most likely, the phrase “of boasting” was added by accident because it appears in the similar phrase in [11:17](../11/17.md). So, it is recommended that you use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2CO	9	5	v9y2	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	the brothers they they would come to you	Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or conclusion from what Paul said in the previous verse (see [9:5](../09/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	9	5	e5b2	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers they they would come to you	Here, the word **brothers** refers to Titus and the two fellow believers who travel with him. See how you translated this word in [9:3](../09/03.md). Alternate translation: “these brothers” or “the three brothers I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	5	cka7	figs-metaphor	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers they they would come to you	Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” or “the Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	9	5	q1up	figs-go	προέλθωσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	the brothers they they would come to you	In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **go**. Alternate translation: “they should come to you beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2CO	9	5	p927	figs-activepassive	τὴν προεπηγγελμένην εὐλογίαν ὑμῶν	1	the brothers they they would come to you	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “blessing that you promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	9	5	wjw5	figs-explicit	τὴν προεπηγγελμένην εὐλογίαν ὑμῶν, ταύτην	1	the brothers they they would come to you	Here Paul uses the word **blessing** to refer to the money that the Corinthians said that they would contribute to Paul’s collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “this blessing of money that you promised” or “this promised gift of yours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	5	zg4e	figs-extrainfo	οὕτως ὡς	1	the brothers they they would come to you	Here Paul uses both the phrase **in this way** and the word **as** to introduce the two ways in which the Corinthians could give to the collection. Your language may only use one form to introduce this information. If so, you could use just one form here. Alternate translation: “as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
2CO	9	5	nm2n	figs-activepassive	μὴ ὡς πλεονεξίαν	1	not as forced	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not as something that we forced you to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	9	6	lmv6	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	the one who sows … will also reap in blessings	Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section. In this section, Paul gives the Corinthians more reasons why they should give generously. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2CO	9	6	gho8	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	the one who sows … will also reap in blessings	Here, the word **this** refers to the words that Paul says in the rest of this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that Paul is referring to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “here is what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	9	6	mm9w	figs-metaphor	ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως, φειδομένως καὶ θερίσει; καὶ ὁ σπείρων ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις, ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις καὶ θερίσει	1	the one who sows … will also reap in blessings	Here Paul speaks as if giving money to the collection were like **sowing** seeds and reaping the harvest from what these seeds produce. In the second clause, he uses the word **blessings** to show the Corinthians how to apply what he says about farmers to the collection. Just as farmers receive a harvest that fits with how the sowed, so people who give to help other believers will receive **blessings** that fit with what and how much they gave. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or clearly express how the metaphor relates to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “giving money to help other believers is like farming. The one sowing sparingly will also reap sparingly, and the one sowing in blessings will also reap in blessings” or “the one sowing sparingly will also reap sparingly, and the one sowing generously will also reap generously. Similarly, the one giving blessings to fellow believers will also receive blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	9	6	kqvb	figs-parallelism	ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως, φειδομένως καὶ θερίσει; καὶ ὁ σπείρων ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις, ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις καὶ θερίσει	1	the one who sows … will also reap in blessings	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “the one sowing sparingly will also reap sparingly; yes, the one sowing in blessings will also reap in blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2CO	9	7	qrhq	figs-gendernotations	προῄρηται τῇ καρδίᾳ	1	let each one give as he has decided in his heart	Although the words **he** and **his** are masculine, Paul is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “he or she has decided beforehand in his or her heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2CO	9	7	tzt4	figs-metonymy	τῇ καρδίᾳ	1	let each one give as he has decided in his heart	In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “in his mind” or “on his own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	9	7	whg6	figs-abstractnouns	μὴ ἐκ λύπης ἢ ἐξ ἀνάγκης	1	not reluctantly or under compulsion	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sorrow** and **compulsion**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “not because you are sad or forced to do so” or “not because you grieve or are required to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	9	7	t26d	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	for God loves a cheerful giver	Here, the word **for** introduces a reason why the Corinthians should not give **from sorrow or from compulsion**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	9	8	kuxl	figs-explicit	πᾶσαν χάριν	1	grace	Here, the word **grace** refers primarily to good things that God has given to the Corinthians, including money and possessions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these things. Alternate translation: “every good thing” or “every blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	8	zxz9	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶσαν χάριν	1	grace	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **gracious**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “everything he gives” or “all his gracious gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	9	8	cz9b	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐν παντὶ πάντοτε πᾶσαν αὐτάρκειαν ἔχοντες	1	God is able to make all grace overflow for you	This phrase introduces a reason why the Corinthians can **abound in every good work**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this relationship clearer. Alternate translation: “since in everything, always, you have all sufficiency” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2CO	9	8	u8w6	figs-abstractnouns	πᾶσαν αὐτάρκειαν ἔχοντες	1	you may abound in every good work	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufficiency**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being completely sufficient” or “being fully self-sufficient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	9	8	jb7i	figs-explicit	πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθόν	1	you may abound in every good work	Here, the phrase **every good work** generally describes any good deed. However, it may also more specifically refer to helping others by giving them what they need. Make sure you use a phrase that could indicate this specific meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “every good act of service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	9	mma1	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	just as it is written	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is just as the writer wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	9	10	p3fl		ὁ & ἐπιχορηγῶν	1	He who supplies	Alternate translation: “God who supplies”
2CO	9	10	b1xe	figs-metonymy	ἄρτον εἰς βρῶσιν	1	bread for food	Here the word **bread** refers to **food** in general. Alternate translation: “food to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	9	10	uts1	figs-metaphor	χορηγήσει καὶ πληθυνεῖ τὸν σπόρον ὑμῶν	1	will supply and multiply your seed for sowing	Paul speaks of the Corinthians’ possessions as if they are seeds and of giving to others as if they were **sowing** seeds. Alternate translation: “will also supply and multiply your possessions so that you can sow them by giving them to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	9	10	ci67	figs-metaphor	αὐξήσει τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν	1	will increase the fruits of your righteousness	Paul compares the benefits that the Corinthians will receive from their generosity to that of a harvest. Alternate translation: “God will bless you even more for your righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	9	10	yv67		τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν	1	the fruits of your righteousness	Here, **righteousness** refers to the righteous actions of the Corinthians in giving their resources to the believers in Jerusalem.
2CO	9	11	eey1	figs-activepassive	πλουτιζόμενοι	1	enriching you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will enrich you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	9	11	b3e5	figs-explicit	ἥτις κατεργάζεται δι’ ἡμῶν, εὐχαριστίαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	which produces thanksgiving to God through us	The word **which** refers to the Corinthian’s generosity. Alternate translation: “Because of your generosity, those who receive the gifts we bring them will thank God” or “and when we give your gifts to those who need them, they will give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	12	l7kq	figs-explicit	ὅτι ἡ διακονία τῆς λειτουργίας ταύτης	1	For the ministry of this service	Here, **service** refers to Paul and his companions bringing the contribution to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “For our carrying out this service for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	9	12	esk7	figs-metaphor	ἀλλὰ καὶ περισσεύουσα διὰ πολλῶν εὐχαριστιῶν τῷ Θεῷ	1	but is also overflowing into many acts of thanksgiving to God	Paul speaks of the Corinthian believers’ act of service as if it were a liquid of which there is more than a container can hold. Alternate translation: “It also causes many deeds for which people will thank God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	9	13	plj4	figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης	1	Because of the proof of this ministry	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Because this service has tested and proven you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	9	13	ze14		δοξάζοντες τὸν Θεὸν ἐπὶ τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας εἰς αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰς πάντας	1	they glorify God for your obedience … the generosity of your sharing with them and with everyone	Paul says that the Corinthians will **glorify God** both by being faithful to Jesus and by giving generously to other believers who have need.
2CO	9	15	es8c		ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ	1	for his inexpressible gift	This **gift** could refer to: (1) “the very great grace” that God has given to the Corinthians, which has led them to be so generous. (2) Jesus Christ, whom God gave to all believers.
2CO	10	intro	abcd			0		# 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.<br><br>In this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Boasting<br><br>“Boasting” is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter “boasting” means confidently exulting or rejoicing.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>In verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Flesh<br><br>“Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
2CO	10	1	yc1g			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul shifts the subject from giving to affirming his authority to teach as he does.
2CO	10	1	gq7j	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	by the meekness and gentleness of Christ	If your language does not use abstract noun for the ideas behind the word **meekness** and **gentleness**, you can express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “I am humble and gentle as I do so, because Christ has made me that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	10	2	i6hh		τοὺς λογιζομένους ἡμᾶς	1	those who regard	Alternate translation: “who think of us”
2CO	10	2	ik1p	figs-metonymy	ὡς κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦντας	1	as walking according to the flesh	Here, **flesh** is a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are acting from human motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	10	3	cvd6	figs-metaphor	ἐν σαρκὶ & περιπατοῦντες	1	we walk in the flesh	Here, **walking** is a metaphor for “living.” Alternate translation: “we live our lives in the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	10	3	zbet	figs-metonymy	ἐν σαρκὶ & περιπατοῦντες	1		Here, **flesh** is a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “we live our lives in physical bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	10	3	k7h8	figs-metaphor	οὐ & στρατευόμεθα	1	we do not wage war	Paul speaks of his trying to persuade the Corinthians to believe him and not the false teachers as if he were fighting a physical **war**. These words should be translated literally. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	10	3	gpd3	figs-metonymy	οὐ κατὰ σάρκα στρατευόμεθα	1	wage war according to the flesh	The word **flesh** is: (1) a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “fight against our enemies using physical weapons” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “wage war in sinful ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	10	4	uf5s	figs-metaphor	τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν οὐ σαρκικὰ, ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες	1	the weapons we fight with … for pulling down arguments	Paul speaks of godly wisdom showing human wisdom to be false as if it were a weapon with which he was destroying an enemy stronghold. Alternate translation: “the weapons we fight with … show people that what our enemies say is completely wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	10	4	d1gj	figs-metonymy	οὐ σαρκικὰ	1	are not fleshly	The word **fleshly** is: (1) a metonym for merely physical. Alternate translation: “are not physical” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are not sinful” or “do not enable us to do wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	10	5	xuz9		πᾶν ὕψωμα ἐπαιρόμενον	1	every high thing that rises up	Paul is still speaking with the metaphor of a war, as if “the knowledge of God” were an army and **every high thing** were a wall that people had made to keep the army out. Alternate translation: “every false argument that proud people think of to protect themselves”
2CO	10	5	b74d		πᾶν ὕψωμα	1	every high thing	Alternate translation: “everything that proud people do”
2CO	10	5	vm1a	figs-metaphor	ἐπαιρόμενον κατὰ τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	rises up against the knowledge of God	Paul speaks of arguments as if they were a wall standing high against an army. The phrase **rises up** mean “stands tall,” not that the “high thing” is floating up into the air. Alternate translation: “people use so they will not have to know who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	10	5	r2yz	figs-metaphor	αἰχμαλωτίζοντες πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	We take every thought captive into obedience to Christ	Paul speaks of people’s thoughts as if they were enemy soldiers whom he captures in battle. Alternate translation: “we show how all the false ideas those people have are wrong and teach the people to obey Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	10	6	m4ds	figs-metonymy	ἐκδικῆσαι πᾶσαν παρακοήν	1	to avenge every act of disobedience	Here, **act of disobedience** is a metonym for the people who commit those acts. Alternate translation: “punish every one of you who disobey us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	10	7	y2yb	figs-rquestion	τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον βλέπετε	1	You are looking at the appearance of things	This could be: (1) a command. (2) a statement. Alternate translation: “You are looking only at what you can see with your eyes.” Some think this is a rhetorical question that may also be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Are you looking at what is clearly in front of you?” or “You seem unable to see what is clearly in front of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	10	7	z1t5		τοῦτο λογιζέσθω πάλιν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ	1	let him remind himself	Alternate translation: “he needs to remember”
2CO	10	7	f3i9		καθὼς αὐτὸς Χριστοῦ, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	that just as he is Christ’s, so also are we	Alternate translation: “we belong to Christ just as much as he does”
2CO	10	8	d4zu	figs-metaphor	εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν ὑμῶν	1	to build you up and not to destroy you	Paul speaks of helping the Corinthians to know Christ better as if he were constructing a building. Alternate translation: “to help you become better followers of Christ and not to discourage you so you stop following him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	10	9	nw6e		ἂν ἐκφοβεῖν ὑμᾶς	1	I would terrify you	Alternate translation: “I am trying to frighten you”
2CO	10	11	m6m6		τοῦτο λογιζέσθω ὁ τοιοῦτος	1	Let such a one consider this	Alternate translation: “I want such people to be aware”
2CO	10	11	g58z		οἷοί ἐσμεν τῷ λόγῳ δι’ ἐπιστολῶν ἀπόντες, τοιοῦτοι καὶ παρόντες τῷ ἔργῳ	1	what we are in the words of our letters when we are absent is what we will be in our actions when we are there	Alternate translation: “we will do the same things when we are there with you that we have written about in our letters while we have been away from you”
2CO	10	11	kb55	figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν	1	we are	Here, **we** refers to Paul’s ministry team but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2CO	10	12	k94z		ἐνκρῖναι ἢ συνκρῖναι ἑαυτούς, τισιν	1	to group or compare ourselves	Alternate translation: “to say we are as good as some”
2CO	10	12	i85y	figs-parallelism	αὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες καὶ συνκρίνοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς	1	they measure themselves by one another and compare themselves with each other	Both of these clauses mean essentially the same thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2CO	10	12	n8sx	figs-metaphor	αὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες	1	they measure themselves by one another	Paul is speaking of goodness as though it were something whose length people could **measure**. Alternate translation: “they look at each other and try to see who is better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	10	12	zwl5		οὐ συνιᾶσιν	1	have no understanding	Alternate translation: “show everyone that they do not know anything”
2CO	10	13	x79x	figs-metaphor		0	General Information:	Paul speaks of the authority he has as if it were a land over which he rules, those things over which he has authority as being within the borders or “limits” of his land, and those things not under his authority as being beyond the “limits.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	10	13	a4ud	figs-idiom	οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχησόμεθα	1	will not boast beyond limits	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “will not boast about things over which we have no authority” or “will boast only about things over which we have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	10	13	u84l		κατὰ τὸ μέτρον τοῦ κανόνος, οὗ ἐμέρισεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς	1	according to the measure of the area that God has assigned to us	Alternate translation: “about things under the authority that God has given us to do”
2CO	10	13	fx2b	figs-metaphor	μέτρου, ἐφικέσθαι ἄχρι καὶ ὑμῶν	1	a measure that reached even as far as you	Paul speaks of the authority he has as if it were a land over which he rules. Alternate translation: “and you are within the border of our authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	10	14	ay6h		οὐ & ὑπερεκτείνομεν ἑαυτούς	1	we are not overextending ourselves	Alternate translation: “we did not go beyond our borders”
2CO	10	15	hu9l	figs-idiom	οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι	1	Neither do we boast beyond limits about	This is an idiom. See how similar words were translated in [2 Corinthians 10:13](../10/13.md). Alternate translation: “And we have not boasted about things over which we have no authority” or “We have not boasted only about things over which we have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	10	16	raq7		ἀλλοτρίῳ κανόνι	1	another person’s area	Alternate translation: “an area that God has assigned to someone else”
2CO	10	17	q8cc		ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1	boast in the Lord	Alternate translation: “let … boast about what the Lord has done”
2CO	10	18	h81t		ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων	1	who commends himself	This means that he provides enough evidence for each person who hears him to decide whether he is right or wrong. See how “recommend ourselves” is translated in [2 Corinthians 4:2](../04/02.md).
2CO	10	18	n5v6	figs-activepassive	οὐ & ἐστιν δόκιμος	1	is approved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is not whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	10	18	sy2r	figs-ellipsis	ὃν ὁ Κύριος συνίστησιν	1	the one whom the Lord commends	You can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “the one whom the Lord recommends is the one of whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	11	intro	abce			0		# 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, Paul continues defending his authority.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### False teaching<br><br>The Corinthians were quick to accept false teachers. They taught things about Jesus and the gospel that were different and not true. Unlike these false teachers, Paul sacrificially served the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])<br><br>### Light<br><br>Light is commonly used in the New Testament as a metaphor. Paul here uses light to indicate the revealing of God and his righteousness. Darkness describes sin. Sin seeks to remain hidden from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Paul begins this chapter with an extended metaphor. He compares himself to the father of a bride who is giving a pure, virgin bride to her bridegroom. Wedding practices change depending on the cultural background. But the idea of helping to present someone as a grown and holy child is explicitly pictured in this passage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Irony<br><br>This chapter is full of irony. Paul is hoping to shame the Corinthian believers with his irony.<br><br>“You tolerate these things well enough!” Paul thinks that they should not tolerate the way the false apostles treated them. Paul does not think they are really apostles at all.<br><br>The statement, “For you gladly put up with fools. You are wise yourselves!” means that the Corinthian believers think they were very wise but Paul does not agree.<br><br>“I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that.” Paul is speaking about behavior he thinks is very wrong in order to avoid it. He is speaking as if he thinks he is wrong for not doing it. He uses a rhetorical question also as irony. “Did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In refuting the false apostles claiming to be superior, Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions. Each question is coupled with an answer: “Are they Hebrews? So am I. Are they Israelites? So am I. Are they descendants of Abraham? So am I. Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more.”<br><br>He also uses a series of rhetorical questions to empathize with his converts: “Who is weak, and I am not weak? Who has caused another to fall into sin, and I do not burn within?”<br><br>### “Are they servants of Christ?”<br><br>This is sarcasm, a special type of irony used to mock or insult. Paul does not believe these false teachers actually serve Christ, only that they pretend to do so.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 30 is a paradox: “If I must boast, I will boast about what shows my weaknesses.” Paul does not explain why he would boast in his weakness until 2 Corinthians 12:9. ([2 Corinthians 11:30](../11/30.md))
2CO	11	1	r4q6		ἀνείχεσθέ μου μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης	1	bear with me in a little bit of foolishness	Alternate translation: “you would allow me allow me to act like a fool”
2CO	11	2	m6vl		ζηλῶ & ὑμᾶς Θεοῦ ζήλῳ	1	jealous … jealousy	These words speak of a good, strong desire that the Corinthians be faithful to Christ, and that no one should persuade them to leave him.
2CO	11	2	ee9i	figs-metaphor	ἡρμοσάμην γὰρ ὑμᾶς ἑνὶ ἀνδρὶ, παρθένον ἁγνὴν παραστῆσαι τῷ Χριστῷ	1	for I promised you in marriage to one husband, to present you as a pure virgin to Christ	Paul speaks of his care for the Corinthian believers as if he had **promised** another man that he would prepare his daughter to marry him and he is most concerned that he be able to keep his promise to the man. Alternate translation: “for I was like a father who promised to present his daughter to one husband. I promised to keep you as a pure virgin so I could give you to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	11	3	l2hr		φοβοῦμαι δὲ, μή πως ὡς ὁ ὄφις ἐξηπάτησεν Εὕαν ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτοῦ, φθαρῇ τὰ νοήματα ὑμῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἁπλότητος καὶ τῆς ἁγνότητος τῆς εἰς τὸν Χριστόν	1	But I am afraid that somehow … the sincerity and the purity that are in Christ	Alternate translation: “But I am afraid that somehow your thoughts might be led astray from a sincere and pure devotion to Christ just as the serpent deceived Eve by his craftiness”
2CO	11	3	m5zn	figs-metaphor	φθαρῇ τὰ νοήματα ὑμῶν	1	your thoughts might be led astray	Paul speaks of **thoughts** as if they were animals that people could lead along the wrong path. Alternate translation: “someone might cause you to believe lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	11	4	wq57		εἰ μὲν γὰρ ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	For if one who comes	Alternate translation: “When anyone comes and”
2CO	11	4	l7m8		πνεῦμα ἕτερον & ὃ οὐκ ἐλάβετε, ἢ εὐαγγέλιον ἕτερον ὃ οὐκ ἐδέξασθε	1	or you receive a different spirit which you did not receive, or you receive a different gospel which you did not accept	Alternate translation: “a different spirit than the Holy Spirit, or a different gospel than you received from us”
2CO	11	4	fs5z		καλῶς ἀνέχεσθε	1	you are bearing with it well	See how these words were translated in [2 Corinthians 11:1](../11/01.md). Alternate translation: “you are dealing correctly with these things”
2CO	11	5	eet1	figs-irony	τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων	1	those super-apostles	Paul uses irony here to show that those teachers are less important then people say there are. Alternate translation: “those teachers whom some think are better than anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
2CO	11	6	f8d1	figs-litotes	οὐ τῇ γνώσει	1	I am not untrained in knowledge	This negative phrase emphasizes the positive truth that he is trained in knowledge. Alternate translation: “I am certainly trained in knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2CO	11	6	n7xy	figs-abstractnouns	οὐ τῇ γνώσει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **knowledge**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “I am trained to know what they know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	11	7	un9v	figs-rquestion	ἢ ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησα ἐμαυτὸν ταπεινῶν, ἵνα ὑμεῖς ὑψωθῆτε, ὅτι δωρεὰν τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν?	1	Or did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?	Paul is beginning to claim that he treated the Corinthians well. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I think we agree that I did not sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	11	7	ax51		δωρεὰν τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν	1	freely preached the gospel of God to you	Alternate translation: “I preached the gospel of God to you without expecting anything from you in return”
2CO	11	8	k6ds	figs-hyperbole	ἄλλας ἐκκλησίας ἐσύλησα	1	I robbed other churches	This is an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul received money from **churches** who were not obligated to give to him. Alternate translation: “I accepted money from other churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2CO	11	8	a416	figs-explicit	τὴν ὑμῶν διακονίαν	1	the ministry to you	The full meaning of this can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I could serve you at no cost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	11	9	a23k		οἱ ἀδελφοὶ ἐλθόντες	1	the brothers who came	These **brothers** were probably all male.
2CO	11	9	fc6l	figs-metaphor	ἐν παντὶ ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν ὑμῖν ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω	1	In everything I have kept myself from being a burden to you	Paul speaks of someone for whom one has to spend money as if they were heavy items that people have to carry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	11	9	sqcf	figs-explicit	ἐν παντὶ ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν ὑμῖν ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω	1		The full meaning of this can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I have done all I can to make sure you do not have to spend money so that I can be with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	11	9	b35r		ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν & ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω	1	I will continue to do that	Alternate translation: “I never will be a burden to you”
2CO	11	10	si2r		ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ	1	the truth of Christ is in me	Paul is emphasizing that because his readers know that he tells the **truth** about **Christ**, they can know that he is telling the truth here. “As surely as you know that I truly know and proclaim the truth about Christ, you could know that what I am about to say is true”
2CO	11	10	nae3	figs-activepassive	ἡ καύχησις αὕτη οὐ φραγήσεται εἰς ἐμὲ	1	this boasting of mine will not be silenced	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one will be able to make me stop boasting and stay silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	11	10	ua2i		ἡ καύχησις αὕτη & εἰς ἐμὲ	1	this boasting of mine	This refers to what Paul spoke about starting in ([2 Corinthians 11:7](../11/07.md)).
2CO	11	11	zqu5	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί? ὅτι οὐκ ἀγαπῶ ὑμᾶς?	1	Why? Because I do not love you?	Paul uses rhetorical questions to emphasize love for the Corinthians. These questions can be combined or made into a statement. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could combine them or express them as statements. Alternate translation: “Is it because I do not love you that I do not want to be a burden to you?” or “I will continue to keep you from paying for my needs because this shows others that I love you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	11	11	rj6f	figs-ellipsis	ὁ Θεὸς οἶδεν	1	God knows	You can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “God knows I love you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	11	12	d9sl	figs-metaphor	ἵνα ἐκκόψω τὴν ἀφορμὴν τῶν θελόντων ἀφορμήν, ἵνα ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται, εὑρεθῶσιν καθὼς καὶ ἡμεῖς	1	in order that I may take away the opportunity	Paul speaks of a false claim that his enemies state as if it were something that he can carry away. Alternate translation: “so that I might make it impossible for those who are trying to get people to regard them as highly as they respect us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	11	12	t4js	figs-activepassive	εὑρεθῶσιν	1	they may be regarded as equal to us	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people will think highly of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	11	13	ml66		οἱ γὰρ τοιοῦτοι	1	For such people	Alternate translation: “I do what I do because people like them”
2CO	11	13	nq3t		ἐργάται δόλιοι	1	deceitful workers	Alternate translation: “dishonest workers”
2CO	11	13	y896		μετασχηματιζόμενοι εἰς ἀποστόλους	1	disguising themselves as apostles	Alternate translation: “are not apostles, but they try to make themselves look like apostles”
2CO	11	14	v9z4	figs-litotes	οὐ θαῦμα	1	no wonder	By stating this in a negative form Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians should expect to meet many “false apostles” ([2 Corinthians 11:13](../11/13.md)). Alternate translation: “we should expect this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2CO	11	14	ss7s		αὐτὸς & ὁ Σατανᾶς μετασχηματίζεται εἰς ἄγγελον φωτός	1	Satan disguises himself as an angel of light	Alternate translation: “Satan is not an angel of light, but he tries to make himself look like an angel of light”
2CO	11	14	mld4	figs-metaphor	ἄγγελον φωτός	1	an angel of light	Here, **light** is a metaphor for righteousness. Alternate translation: “an angel of righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	11	15	fvx7	figs-litotes	οὐ μέγα & εἰ	1	it is no great thing	By stating this in a negative form Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians should expect to meet many “false apostles” ([2 Corinthians 11:13](../11/13.md)). Alternate translation: “we should certainly expect to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2CO	11	15	sb58		καὶ οἱ διάκονοι αὐτοῦ μετασχηματίζονται ὡς διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης	1	his servants also disguise themselves as servants of righteousness	Alternate translation: “his servants are not servants of righteousness, but they try to make themselves look like servants of righteousness”
2CO	11	16	s962		γε κἂν ὡς ἄφρονα δέξασθέ με, ἵνα κἀγὼ μικρόν τι καυχήσωμαι	1	receive me as a fool so I may boast a little	Alternate translation: “receive me as you would receive a fool: let me talk, and consider my boasting the words of a fool”
2CO	11	18	t4ic	figs-metonymy	κατὰ σάρκα	1	according to the flesh	Here the metonym **flesh** refers to man in his sinful nature and his achievements. Alternate translation: “about their own human achievements” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	11	19	u8f3		ἀνέχεσθε τῶν ἀφρόνων	1	put up with the foolish	See how a similar phrase was translated in [2 Corinthians 11:1](../11/01.md). Alternate translation: “you … accept me when I act like a fool”
2CO	11	19	si6l	figs-irony	φρόνιμοι ὄντες	1	being wise	Paul is shaming the Corinthians by using irony. Alternate translation: “thinking that you are wise, even through you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
2CO	11	20	zmfo	figs-hyperbole	εἴ τις ὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ, εἴ τις κατεσθίει	1		Paul is using exaggeration when he speaks of some people forcing others to obey rules as if they were forcing them to be slaves or devouring them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2CO	11	20	lu7d	figs-metaphor	ὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ	1	enslaves you	Paul speaks of people forcing others to obey rules as if they were forcing them to be slaves. Alternate translation: “makes you follow rules they have thought of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	11	20	sr4n	figs-metaphor	κατεσθίει	1	he consumes you	Paul speaks of the super-apostles’ taking people’s material resources as if they were eating the people themselves. Alternate translation: “takes all your property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	11	20	yn5t		λαμβάνει	1	takes advantage of you	A person **takes advantage of** another person by knowing things that the other person does not and using that knowledge to help himself and harm the other person.
2CO	11	21	n8s9	figs-irony	κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω ὡς ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠσθενήκαμεν!	1	I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that	Paul is using irony to tell the Corinthians that it was not because he was **weak** that he treated them well. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to say that we had the power to harm you, but we treated you well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
2CO	11	21	v8a3		ἐν ᾧ & ἄν τις τολμᾷ & τολμῶ κἀγώ	1	Yet if anyone boasts … I too will boast	Alternate translation: “in whatever anyone boasts about … I will dare to boast about it also”
2CO	11	22	jdq8	figs-rquestion	Ἑβραῖοί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. Ἰσραηλεῖταί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ εἰσιν? κἀγώ.	1	Are they Hebrews? … Are they Israelites? … Are they descendants of Abraham?	Paul is asking and answering questions the Corinthians might be asking to emphasize that he is as much a Jew as the super-apostles are. You should keep the question-and-answer form if possible. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “They want you to think they are important and to believe what they say because they are Hebrews and Israelites and descendants of Abraham. Well, so am I!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	11	23	a4tz	figs-rquestion	διάκονοι Χριστοῦ εἰσιν? (παραφρονῶν λαλῶ), ὑπὲρ ἐγώ	1	Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more	Paul continues asking and answering questions the Corinthians might be asking to emphasize that he is as much a Jew as the super-apostles are. You should keep the question-and-answer form if possible. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “They say they are servants of Christ—I speak as though I were out of my mind—but I am more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	11	23	bq23		παραφρονῶν λαλῶ	1	as though I were out of my mind	Alternate translation: “I speak as though I were unable to think well”
2CO	11	23	vy54	figs-ellipsis	ὑπὲρ ἐγώ	1	I am more	You can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “I am more a servant of Christ than they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2CO	11	23	s8wq		ἐν κόποις περισσοτέρως	1	in even more hard work	Alternate translation: “I have worked harder”
2CO	11	23	dr6x		ἐν φυλακαῖς περισσοτέρως	1	in far more imprisonments	Alternate translation: “I have been in prisons more often”
2CO	11	23	cs3f	figs-idiom	ἐν πληγαῖς ὑπερβαλλόντως	1	in beatings beyond measure	Here, **beyond measure** is an idiom that means he had been beaten many, many times. Alternate translation: “I have been beaten very many times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2CO	11	23	qdcm	figs-hyperbole	ἐν πληγαῖς ὑπερβαλλόντως	1		This is exaggerated to emphasize that he had been beaten many, many times. Alternate translation: “I have been beaten too many times to bother counting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2CO	11	23	r6jv		ἐν θανάτοις πολλάκις	1	in facing many dangers of death	Alternate translation: “and I have almost died many times”
2CO	11	24	ttz2		τεσσεράκοντα παρὰ μίαν	1	forty lashes minus one	This was a common expression for being whipped 39 times. In Jewish law the most they were allowed to whip a person at one time was forty lashes. So they commonly whipped a person thirty-nine times so that they would be guilty of whipping someone too many times if the accidentally counted wrong.
2CO	11	25	u9xc	figs-activepassive	ἐραβδίσθην	1	I was beaten with rods	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people beat me with wooden rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	11	25	xk9w	figs-activepassive	ἐλιθάσθην	1	I was stoned	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people threw stones at me until they thought I was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	11	25	b4kz		νυχθήμερον ἐν τῷ βυθῷ πεποίηκα	1	I have spent a night and a day on the open sea	Paul was referring to floating in the water after the ship he was on sank.
2CO	11	26	b3j9	figs-explicit	κινδύνοις ἐν ψευδαδέλφοις	1	in danger from false brothers	The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and in danger from people who claimed to be brothers in Christ, but who betrayed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	11	27	ds5h	figs-hyperbole	γυμνότητι	1	nakedness	Here Paul exaggerates to show his need of clothing. Alternate translation: “without enough clothing to keep me warm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2CO	11	28	n1q5	figs-metaphor	ἡ ἐπίστασίς μοι ἡ καθ’ ἡμέραν, ἡ μέριμνα πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν	1	there is the daily pressure on me of my anxiety	Paul knows that God will hold him responsible for how well the **churches** obey God and speaks of that knowledge as if it were a heavy object pushing him down. Alternate translation: “I know that God will hold me accountable for the spiritual growth of all the churches, and so I always feel like a heavy object is pushing me down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	11	29	fvz6	figs-rquestion	τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ?	1	Who is weak, and I am not weak?	This rhetorical question emphasizes that Paul cares about people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Whenever anyone is weak, I feel that weakness also.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	11	29	hhb2	figs-metaphor	τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ?	1	Who is weak, and I am not weak?	The word **weak** is probably a metaphor for a spiritual condition, but no one is sure what Paul is speaking of, so it is best to use the same word here. Alternate translation: “I am weak whenever anyone else is weak.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	11	29	g5am	figs-metaphor	τίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι?	1	Who has been caused to stumble, and I do not burn?	Here Paul’s anger is spoken of as a burning inside him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	11	29	bdd4	figs-rquestion	τίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι?	1		Paul uses this question to express his anger when a fellow believer is caused to sin. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Whenever anyone causes a brother to sin, I am angry.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	11	29	xu57	figs-metaphor	σκανδαλίζεται	1	has been caused to stumble	Paul speaks of sin as if it were tripping over something and then falling. Alternate translation: “has been led to sin” or “has thought that God would permit him to sin because of something that someone else did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	11	30	gxe6		τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας	1	what shows my weaknesses	Alternate translation: “what shows how weak I am”
2CO	11	31	yx8z	figs-litotes	οὐ ψεύδομαι	1	I am not lying	Paul is using litotes to emphasize that he is telling the truth. Alternate translation: “I am telling the absolute truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2CO	11	32	n383		ὁ ἐθνάρχης Ἁρέτα τοῦ βασιλέως ἐφρούρει τὴν πόλιν	1	the governor under King Aretas was guarding the city	Alternate translation: “the governor whom King Aretas had appointed had told men to guard the city”
2CO	11	32	j7de		πιάσαι με	1	to arrest me	Alternate translation: “so that they might catch and arrest me”
2CO	11	33	i8xa	figs-activepassive	ἐν σαργάνῃ, ἐχαλάσθην	1	I was lowered in a basket	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some people put me in a basket and lowered me to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	11	33	aw7d	figs-metonymy	τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ	1	from his hands	Paul uses the governor’s **hands** as metonymy for the governor. Alternate translation: “from the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	12	intro	abcf			0		# 2 Corinthians 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul continues defending his authority in this chapter.<br><br>When Paul was with the Corinthians, he proved himself to be an apostle by his powerful deeds. He had not ever taken anything from them. Now that he is coming for the third time, he will still not take anything. He hopes that when he visits, he will not need to be harsh with them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Paul’s vision<br><br>Paul now defends his authority by telling about a wonderful vision of heaven. Although he speaks in the third person in verses 2-5, verse 7 indicates that he was the person who experienced the vision. It was so great, God gave him a physical handicap to keep him humble. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])<br><br>### Third heaven<br><br>Many scholars believe the “third” heaven is the dwelling place of God. This is because Scripture also uses “heaven” to refer to the sky (the “first” heaven) and the universe (the “second” heaven).<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses many rhetorical questions as he defends himself against his enemies who accused him: “For how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that I was not a burden to you?” “Did Titus take advantage of you? Did we not walk in the same way? Did we not walk in the same steps?” and “Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Sarcasm<br><br>Paul uses sarcasm, a special type of irony, when he reminds them how he had helped them at no cost. He says, “Forgive me for this wrong!” He also uses regular irony when he says: “But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit.” He uses it to introduce his defense against this accusation by showing how impossible it was to be true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 5 is a paradox: “I will not boast, except about my weaknesses.” Most people do not boast about being weak. This sentence in verse 10 is also a paradox: “For whenever I am weak, then I am strong.” In verse 9, Paul explains why both of these statements are true. ([2 Corinthians 12:5](../12/05.md))
2CO	12	1	iwn3			0	Connecting Statement:	In defending his apostleship from God, Paul continues to state specific things that have happened to him since he became a believer.
2CO	12	1	iur3		ἐλεύσομαι & εἰς	1	I will go on to	Alternate translation: “I will continue talking, but now about”
2CO	12	1	rb42	figs-hendiadys	ὀπτασίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεις Κυρίου	1	visions and revelations from the Lord	This could mean: (1) Paul uses the words **visions** and **revelations** to mean the same thing in hendiadys for emphasis. Alternate translation: “things that the Lord has allowed only me to see” (2) Paul is speaking of two different things. Alternate translation: “secret things that the Lord has let me see with my eyes and other secrets that he has told me about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2CO	12	2	cz7u		οἶδα ἄνθρωπον ἐν Χριστῷ	1	I know a man in Christ	Paul is actually speaking of himself as if he were speaking of someone else, but this should be translated literally if possible.
2CO	12	2	fth2		εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα	1	whether in the body, I do not know, or out of the body, I do not know	Paul continues to describe himself as if this happened to another person. “I do not know if this man was in his physical body or in his spiritual body”
2CO	12	2	k4aw		τρίτου οὐρανοῦ	1	the third heaven	Here, the **third heaven** refers to the dwelling place of God rather than the sky or outer space (the planets, stars, and the universe).
2CO	12	4	qv5h		ἡρπάγη εἰς τὸν Παράδεισον	1	was caught up into paradise	Paul continues his account of what happened to “this man” (verse 3). If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God took this man into **paradise**. (2) an angel took this man into **paradise**. If possible, it would be best not to name the one who took the man: “someone took him up to paradise” or “they took him up to paradise.”
2CO	12	4	wm7y		ἡρπάγη	1	caught up	Here, **caught up** refers to being suddenly and forcefully held and taken.
2CO	12	4	ic45		τὸν Παράδεισον	1	paradise	Here, **paradise** could refer to: (1) heaven. (2) the third heaven. (3) a special place in heaven.
2CO	12	5	hpq6		τοῦ τοιούτου	1	of such a person	Alternate translation: “of that person”
2CO	12	5	i12f		οὐ καυχήσομαι, εἰ μὴ ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις	1	I will not boast, except about my weaknesses	You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “I will boast only of my weaknesses”
2CO	12	6	p8fm		μή τις εἰς ἐμὲ λογίσηται ὑπὲρ ὃ βλέπει με, ἢ ἀκούει ἐξ ἐμοῦ	1	no one will think more of me than what he sees in me or hears from me	Alternate translation: “no one will give me more credit than what he sees in me or hears from me”
2CO	12	7	v5s7			0	General Information:	This verse reveals that Paul was speaking about himself beginning in [2 Corinthians 12:2](../12/02.md).
2CO	12	7	xxi2		τῇ ὑπερβολῇ τῶν ἀποκαλύψεων	1	because of the surpassing greatness of the revelations	Alternate translation: “because those revelations were so much greater than anything anyone else had ever seen”
2CO	12	7	hu8g	figs-activepassive	ἐδόθη μοι σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί	1	a thorn in the flesh was given to me	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God gave me a thorn in the flesh” or “God allowed me to have a thorn in the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	12	7	q5e7	figs-metaphor	σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί	1	a thorn in the flesh	Here Paul’s physical problems are compared to a **thorn** piercing his **flesh**. Alternate translation: “an affliction” or “a physical problem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	12	7	q7lz		ἄγγελος Σατανᾶ	1	a messenger from Satan	Alternate translation: “a servant of Satan”
2CO	12	7	ehp9		μὴ ὑπεραίρωμαι	2	overly proud	Alternate translation: “I would not become too proud”
2CO	12	8	n76p		τρὶς	1	Three times	Paul put the words **three times** at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that he had prayed many times about his “thorn” ([2 Corinthians 12:7](../12/07.md)).
2CO	12	8	wc7r		ὑπὲρ τούτου	1	Lord about this	Alternate translation: “about this thorn in the flesh,” or “about this affliction”
2CO	12	9	nr2j		ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου	1	My grace is enough for you	Alternate translation: “I will be kind to you, and that is all you need”
2CO	12	9	cs63		ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται	1	for power is made perfect in weakness	Alternate translation: “for my power works best when you are weak”
2CO	12	9	g8mi	figs-metaphor	ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the power of Christ might reside on me	Paul speaks of the **power of Christ** as if it were a tent built over him. This could mean: (1) people might see that Paul has the power of Christ. (2) Paul truly has the power of Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	12	10	pxf1		εὐδοκῶ ἐν ἀσθενείαις, ἐν ὕβρεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν διωγμοῖς, καὶ στενοχωρίαις, ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ	1	I am content for Christ’s sake in weaknesses, in insults, in troubles, in persecutions and distressing situations	This could mean: (1) Paul is **content** in **weaknesses**, **insults**, **troubles**, **persecutions**, and **distressing situations** if these things come because I belong to Christ. (2) Paul is content in weakness if these things cause more people to know Christ.
2CO	12	10	s5sx		ἐν ἀσθενείαις	1	in weaknesses	Alternate translation: “when I am weak”
2CO	12	10	xl8q		ἐν ὕβρεσιν	1	in insults	Alternate translation: “when people try to make me angry by saying that I am a bad person”
2CO	12	10	hza1		ἐν ἀνάγκαις	1	in troubles	Alternate translation: “when I am suffering”
2CO	12	10	c4t2		στενοχωρίαις	1	distressing situations	Alternate translation: “when there is trouble”
2CO	12	10	t7qg		ὅταν γὰρ ἀσθενῶ, τότε δυνατός εἰμι	1	For whenever I am weak, then I am strong	Paul is saying that when he is no longer **strong** enough to do what needs to be done, Christ, who is more powerful than Paul could ever be, will work through Paul to do what needs to be done. However, it would be best to translate these words literally, if your language allows.
2CO	12	11	a1ym		γέγονα ἄφρων	1	I have become a fool	Alternate translation: “I am acting like a fool”
2CO	12	11	pzw1		ὑμεῖς με ἠναγκάσατε	1	You forced me to this	Alternate translation: “You forced me to talk this way”
2CO	12	11	v2lr	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ & ὤφειλον ὑφ’ ὑμῶν συνίστασθαι	1	I should have been commended by you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you should have praised me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	12	11	f644		συνίστασθαι	1	commended	See how you translated similar phrases in ([3:1](../03/01.md)) and ([4:2](../04/02.md)). Alternate translation: “been praised” or “been recommended”
2CO	12	11	h4d5	figs-litotes	οὐδὲν γὰρ ὑστέρησα	1	For I was not at all inferior	By using the negative form, Paul is saying strongly that those Corinthians who think that he is **inferior** are wrong. Alternate translation: “For I am just as good as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2CO	12	11	s82x	figs-irony	τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων	1	super-apostles	Paul uses irony here to show that those teachers are less important then people say they are. See how this is translated in [2 Corinthians 11:5](../11/05.md). Alternate translation: “those teachers whom some think are better than anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
2CO	12	12	kp5l	figs-activepassive	τὰ μὲν σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου κατειργάσθη	1	indeed the signs of an apostle were performed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form with emphasis on the **signs**, or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it is the true signs of an apostle that I performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	12	12	d4um		σημείοις τε, καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ δυνάμεσιν	1	signs and wonders and mighty deeds	These are the “signs of an apostle” that Paul performed “with all perseverance.”
2CO	12	13	z35e	figs-rquestion	τί γάρ ἐστιν ὃ ἡσσώθητε ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας, εἰ μὴ ὅτι αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν?	1	how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that … you?	Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians are wrong to accuse him of wanting to do them harm. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I treated you the same way I treated all the other churches, except that I myself did not burden you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	12	13	d426		αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν	1	I was not a burden to you	Alternate translation: “I did not ask you for money or other things I needed”
2CO	12	13	sy7v	figs-irony	χαρίσασθέ μοι τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην!	1	Forgive me for this wrong!	Paul is being ironic to shame the Corinthians. Both he and they know that he has done them no wrong, but they have been treating him as though he has wronged them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
2CO	12	13	u1w9		τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην	1	this wrong	Here, **this wrong** refers to not asking them for money and other things he needed.
2CO	12	14	ugk1	figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ ὑμᾶς	1	but you	The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “but what I want is that you love and accept me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	12	14	wd97		οὐ & ὀφείλει τὰ τέκνα τοῖς γονεῦσιν θησαυρίζειν	3	children should not save up for the parents	Young **children** are not responsible for saving money or other goods to give to their healthy **parents**.
2CO	12	15	vj2m	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ & ἥδιστα δαπανήσω καὶ ἐκδαπανηθήσομαι	1	I will most gladly spend and be spent	Paul speaks of his work and his physical life as if it were money that he or God could **spend**. Alternate translation: “I will gladly do any work and gladly allow God to permit people to kill me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	12	15	nk8v	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν	1	for your souls	The word **souls** is a metonym for the people themselves. Alternate translation: “for you” or “so you will live well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	12	15	t3na	figs-rquestion	εἰ περισσοτέρως ὑμᾶς ἀγαπῶν, ἧσσον ἀγαπῶμαι?	1	If I love you more, am I to be loved less?	This rhetorical question to emphasize that the Corinthians should love Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “If I love you so much, you should not love me so little.” or “If I love you so much, you should love me more than you do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	12	15	j887		περισσοτέρως	1	more	It is not clear what it is that Paul’s love is **more** than. It is probably best to use “very much” or a “so much” that can be compared to “so little” later in the sentence.
2CO	12	16	ur5x	figs-irony	ἀλλὰ ὑπάρχων πανοῦργος δόλῳ, ὑμᾶς ἔλαβον	1	But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit	Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians who think he lied to them even if he did not ask them for money. Alternate translation: “but others think I was deceptive and used trickery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
2CO	12	17	vb7q	figs-rquestion	μή τινα ὧν ἀπέσταλκα πρὸς ὑμᾶς, δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐπλεονέκτησα ὑμᾶς?	1	I did not take advantage of you by any of those whom I sent to you, did I?	Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer is “no.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one that I sent to you has taken advantage of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	12	18	pjl2	figs-rquestion	μήτι ἐπλεονέκτησεν ὑμᾶς Τίτος?	1	Titus did not take advantage of you, did he?	Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer is “no.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Titus certainly did not take advantage of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	12	18	acg6	figs-metaphor	οὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν	1	Did we not walk in the same way?	Paul speaks of living as if it were walking on a road. Alternate translation: “We all walk in the same spirit.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	12	18	rjiy	figs-rquestion	οὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν	1		Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer to the question is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We all have the same attitude and live alike.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	12	18	k6b3	figs-rquestion	οὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν?	1	Did we not walk in the same steps?	Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer to the question is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We all walk in the same steps.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	12	18	oket	figs-metaphor	οὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν?	1		Paul speaks of living as if it were walking on a road. Alternate translation: “We all do things the same way.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	12	19	g1iw	figs-rquestion	πάλαι δοκεῖτε ὅτι ὑμῖν ἀπολογούμεθα?	1	Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?	Paul uses this question to acknowledge something that the people may have been thinking. He does this so that he can assure them that it is not true. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Perhaps you think that all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	12	19	ih3e	figs-metaphor	κατέναντι Θεοῦ	1	Before God	Paul speaks of **God** knowing everything Paul does as if God were physically present and observed everything Paul said and did. Alternate translation: “With God as witness” or “In the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	12	19	vg3u	figs-metaphor	ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν οἰκοδομῆς	1	for your strengthening	Paul speaks of knowing how to obey God and desiring to obey him as if it were physical growth. Alternate translation: “so that you would know God and obey him better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	12	20	cu6s		οὐχ οἵους θέλω, εὕρω ὑμᾶς	1	I may not find you as I wish	Alternate translation: “I may not like what I find” or “I may not like what I see you doing”
2CO	12	20	zy6g		κἀγὼ εὑρεθῶ ὑμῖν οἷον οὐ θέλετε	1	I may not be found by you as you wish	Alternate translation: “you might not like what you see in me”
2CO	12	20	rh1h	figs-abstractnouns	μή πως ἔρις, ζῆλος, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, καταλαλιαί, ψιθυρισμοί, φυσιώσεις, ἀκαταστασίαι	1	there may be quarreling, jealousy, outbursts of anger, rivalries, slander, gossip, arrogance, and disorder	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **quarreling, jealousy, outbursts of anger, rivalries, slander, gossip, arrogance, and disorder**, you can express the same ideas with verbal forms. This could mean: (1) some of you will be arguing with us, jealous of us, suddenly becoming very angry with us, trying to take our places as leaders, speaking falsely about us, telling about our private lives, being proud, and opposing us as we try to lead you. (2) some of you will be arguing with each other, jealous of each other, suddenly becoming very angry with each other, quarreling with each other over who will be the leader, speaking falsely about each other, telling about each other’s private lives, being proud, and opposing those whom God has chosen to lead you. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	12	21	ddw3		πενθήσω πολλοὺς τῶν προημαρτηκότων,	1	I might be grieved by many of those who have sinned	Alternate translation: “I will be grieved because many of them have not given up their old sins”
2CO	12	21	hq1e	figs-parallelism	μὴ μετανοησάντων ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ πορνείᾳ, καὶ ἀσελγείᾳ	1	did not repent of the impurity and sexual immorality and lustful indulgence	This could mean: (1) Paul is saying almost the same thing three times for emphasis. Alternate translation: “did not stop commiting the sexual sins that they practiced” (2) Paul is speaking of three different sins. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2CO	12	21	rh22	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ	1	of the impurity	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **impurity**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of secretly thinking about and desiring things that do not please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	12	21	rn6u	figs-abstractnouns	πορνείᾳ	1	of the … sexual immorality	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **sexual immorality**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of doing sexually immoral deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	12	21	yyr5	figs-abstractnouns	ἀσελγείᾳ	1	of the … lustful indulgence	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **lustful indulgence**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “doing things that satisfy immoral sexual desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	13	intro	abcg			0		# 2 Corinthians 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, Paul finishes defending his authority. He then concludes the letter with a final greeting and blessing.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Preparation<br><br>Paul instructs the Corinthians as he prepares to visit them. He is hoping to avoid needing to discipline anyone in the church so he can visit them joyfully. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Power and weakness<br><br>Paul repeatedly uses the contrasting words “power” and “weakness” in this chapter. The translator should use words that are understood to be opposites of each other.<br><br>### “Examine yourselves to see if you are in the faith. Test yourselves.”<br><br>Scholars are divided over what these sentences mean. Some scholars say that Christians are to test themselves to see whether their actions align with their Christian faith. The context favors this understanding. Others say these sentences mean that Christians should look at their actions and question whether they are genuinely saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
2CO	13	1	slj1	figs-activepassive	ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα	1	Every matter must be established by the evidence of two or three witnesses	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Only if two or three people have said the same thing about another person should God's people believe that it is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	13	1	xfhc		ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα	1		Paul is quoting here from Deuteronomy 19:15. He has been accusing the Corinthian believers of doing wrong, and so he compares the number of his visits, during which he has observed and will observe this wrong behavior, with the number of witnesses that the Old Testament required for convicting someone of doing wrong. You may want to include some of this information in a footnote.
2CO	13	1	gs3j	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ στόματος	1		Paul is using the term **mouth** to mean the words that people say by using their mouths. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression from your language or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the word” or “on the testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2CO	13	2	fxl6		τοῖς λοιποῖς πᾶσιν	1	all the rest	Alternate translation: “to all of you other believers”
2CO	13	2	ijip	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν ἔλθω	1		Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that he does intend to come again to Corinth. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	13	2	kfzf	figs-explicit	οὐ φείσομαι	1		The implication is that, when Paul comes, he will punish any believer there who is continuing to live sinfully. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I will not withhold punishment from anyone who is sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	13	2	da34	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ φείσομαι	1		If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **spare**. Alternate translation: “I will certainly punish everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2CO	13	3	svtr	figs-abstractnouns	δοκιμὴν ζητεῖτε τοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ λαλοῦντος Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **proof**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you want me to prove that Christ speaks through me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	13	3	kiw2		ἐν ἐμοὶ λαλοῦντος	1		Alternate translation: “speaking through me”
2CO	13	3	ffwe	writing-pronouns	ὃς	1		The pronoun **who** refers to **Christ**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could say this here. If you do this, you may want to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2CO	13	3	vd3j	figs-explicit	ἀλλὰ δυνατεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν	1		The implication is that Christ will be powerful among the Corinthian believers when Paul comes and disciplines them using Christ's power. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “but will punish you powerfully when I come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO	13	4	a1bf	figs-activepassive	καὶ&ἐσταυρώθη	1	he was crucified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2CO	13	4	rha6	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἀσθενείας	-1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **weakness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when he was weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	13	4	kh0y	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ δυνάμεως Θεοῦ	-1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God works powerfully … because God works powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2CO	13	4	ezsm	figs-metaphor	ἀσθενοῦμεν ἐν αὐτῷ	-1		Here, Paul is speaking of his relationship to Christ as if he were inside of Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are weak as we imitate him” or “are weak, just as he was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	13	5	ybkc	figs-parallelism	ἑαυτοὺς πειράζετε&ἑαυτοὺς δοκιμάζετε	1		These two phrases mean the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If your language does not have two ways to say this, you could repeat the same phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Test yourselves … Indeed, you must test yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2CO	13	5	z2oq	figs-rpronouns	ἑαυτοὺς	-1		The word translated **yourselves** is plural, referring to all of the Corinthian believers. However, the meaning is that each believer is to examine himself, not that they should examine each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as singular, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2CO	13	5	q28n	figs-metaphor	ἐστὲ ἐν τῇ πίστει	1		Here, Paul is speaking of **faith** as if it were a substance of which the Corinthians could be inside. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you truly believe in the Messiah” or “you are being faithful to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	13	5	qvxm	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ ἐπιγινώσκετε ἑαυτοὺς, ὅτι Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μήτι ἀδόκιμοί ἐστε	1		Paul is using the question form here to emphasize to the Corinthian believers something that is true: that Jesus Christ does live in them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know that it is Jesus Christ himself who lives within you—unless you are not in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	13	5	sbx4	figs-metaphor	ἐν ὑμῖν	1	in you	Here, **in you** could mean: (1) Jesus is intimately connected to each believing individual, as if Jesus were living inside each person. Alternate translation: “part of who you are” (2) Jesus is living among them, part of and the most important member of the group. Alternate translation: “among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2CO	13	6	xk7u	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐλπίζω	1	in you	Paul speaks as if he were uncertain about whether or not the Corinthian believers would understand that he is a true follower or apostle of Christ. He does this in order to convey modesty, but he is actually sure of this. If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying here is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “I am sure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2CO	13	6	f8o8	figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς	1	in you	Here the word **ourselves** emphasizes that Paul is talking about his apostolic team, who introduced the Corinthian believers to Jesus Christ. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “who brought you to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2CO	13	6	zhkw	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἐσμὲν ἀδόκιμοι	1	in you	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **unapproved**. Alternate translation: “we … are approved” or “we … live as one with the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2CO	13	7	u75e	figs-doublenegatives	μὴ ποιῆσαι ὑμᾶς κακὸν μηδέν	1	that you may not do any wrong	If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … wrong**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “you will do everything right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2CO	13	7	gt2e		δόκιμοι	1	to have passed the test	Alternate translation: “to be great teachers and live the truth”
2CO	13	8	a3l7		οὐ & δυνάμεθά τι κατὰ τῆς ἀληθείας	1	we are not able to do anything against the truth	Alternate translation: “we are not able to keep people from learning the truth”
2CO	13	9	vt7b		τὴν ὑμῶν κατάρτισιν	1	for your perfection	Alternate translation: “that you may become spiritually mature”
2CO	13	10	rlm8	figs-metaphor	εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν.	1	for building up, and not for tearing down	Paul speaks of helping the Corinthians to know Christ better as if he were constructing a building. See how you translated a similar phrase in [2 Corinthians 10:8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “to help you become better followers of Christ and not to discourage you so you stop following him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2CO	13	11	uk1p			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul closes his letter to the Corinthian believers.
2CO	13	11	fm8m		καταρτίζεσθε	1	Be restored	Alternate translation: “Work toward maturity”
2CO	13	11	diw1		τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖτε	1	be of the same mind	Alternate translation: “live in harmony with one another”
2CO	13	12	p1nh		ἐν ἁγίῳ φιλήματι	1	with a holy kiss	Alternate translation: “with Christian love”
2CO	13	12	x2qd		οἱ ἅγιοι	1	the saints	Alternate translation: “those whom God has set apart for himself”